Marilyn, a computer bulletin board friend had agreed to meet
him for the first time. She wanted to know more about the use of
hypnosis in sex. They had shared many thoughts on previous evenings. Some were simply warm and friendly, and others were
downright steaming. They had discussed everything from children
and pets to jumping one another’s bones.

Jim and Marilyn had become rather close friends without ever
having met one another. They had each teased from time to time
about meeting one day, but Jim never really expected Marilyn to
meet with him. Now she had agreed, and they were scheduled to see
each other this evening in a local night spot at eight o’clock.
They had some idea of how one another looked and a very good idea
of what one another thought. He was anxious and hoped that she
shared his excitement.

The day seemed to last forever. Everything appeared to be
moving in slow motion. His productivity for the day was, as a
result, outstanding as he tried to occupy the struggling moments
toward the end of the work day. Fridays were somewhat traditional
in that he never went directly home after the work day’s end. He
would generally frequent a local downtown watering hole until
about seven; remove to one of his favorite restaurants for a bite
to eat; and visit one of several of the local hot spots around
town.

Jim arrived at the cafe at about five o’clock and sat in his
favorite chair at the far corner of the bar. He greeted several
friends as they entered and exchanged comments about the grueling
week. He had a difficult time concentrating on the various con-
versations because his mind was on Marilyn. Would she find him
exciting?

Seven-thirty had arrived. Jim paid his bill and rose to
leave. His mind was dissecting the possibilities of the evening
as he drove to Rascal’s lounge. As he pulled into the broken
black-topped parking lot he had visions of Marilyn’s lovely nude
body resting on his chest. He almost didn’t see the attendant
provided to direct him to available parking. His car rested well
between two other chariots as he entered the lounge.

Jim went through the doorway with eyes wide, searching for
the evening’s target. There was no single lady at the bar, so Jim
selected a seat with a view of the entry way and ordered a drink.
He noticed that his hands seemed to have a life of their own.
They were shaking as he attempted to stir his grog. Furtive eyes
continued to paint the doorway to the lounge and still no
Marilyn. It was only ten minutes to eight and no need for con-
cern. She would show.

In a nonchalant manner, Jim allowed his eyes to travel
throughout the bar. He wasn’t sure but thought that a lovely
young lady sitting with another man was checking him out rather
well. Bright eyes sparkled from an angelic face. Jim couldn’t
help but notice her deep, dark and warm cleavage floating in
waves, hugged by the material of a blood-red dress, as her
shoulders moved back and forth. The curl of her generous lips and
her bright smile teased Jim as she continued her conversation
with the man next to her. Just his luck; here was a hot, sexy
woman that seemed to have interest in him. Not only was she with
another man, Jim was waiting for a woman that he had no idea of
how she looked.

He had trouble watching the entrance in anticipation of
Marilyn. Each time his eyes moved to the door he was distracted
by the lovely woman’s breasts. They seemed to be calling to him.
He continued to try to get this woman out of his mind, but she
wouldn’t stop sneaking glances as him. Suddenly, she rose from
her bar stool and began walking toward the rest room. Jim’s eyes
were now drawn to her magnetic buttocks. The material of her
dress seemed to massage each cheek of her undulating ass. Damn!
He would love to drink her bath water just to see her dry off.
Few times had he ever gotten an erection just looking at a woman
in a bar. This was one of them.

Jim’s eyes returned to the door once again and he noticed
the man that had been sitting with the object of his new interest
was walking out of the lounge; apparently leaving. Jim almost
hurt his neck as he spun his head back to see where the lovely
lady in red was. Soon she returned from the rest room, leaned
forward, said something to the bartender and began walking
directly toward Jim.

Her lovely breasts continued to dance slightly as she ap-
proached. Jim wanted to look behind him to see if she was ap-
proaching someone behind him but thought that would be obvious
and make him look ridiculous. His eyes riveted on the rim of his
glass to prevent him from looking like an idiot. Soon he heard a
whispered, “is this seat taken?”

“Nn nnno! Please do sit down. There isn’t anyone sitting
there,” Jim heard himself fumble through the words. Damn, why did
he sound like such a fool.

The red dressed lady eased up to the bar and pulled her seat
after her. After she was obviously well settled, Jim made half a
motion to get up and fix her chair for her. Too late, he thought.
“Are you waiting for someone?” she breathed to Jim.

Now what was he going to say? The fragrance of her scent
captured him, and he wanted to tell her that he had been waiting
for her ever since the doctor first slapped his ass, forty-three
years ago. He gagged on his words slightly, and then his mind
snapped back to his intended purpose. He almost felt guilty that
he was even thinking of this new lady, and he said, “Yes. I,m
waiting for a friend.”

She rolled her shoulders once again and asked, “What is your
friend’s name Jim?”

“Her name is…but… How did you know my name was Jim?” he
returned, and then it began to sink in. “You can’t be Marilyn!”
He stuttered.

Her smile grew to a full blown show of pearl delight. “When
I left the house my name was Marilyn,” she stated emphatically.
“You’re probably wondering what I was doing with that man that
was sitting next to me. That was my cousin. I have to confess
that I asked him to stop and have a drink with me so I would have
a way out if you turned out to be a wild looking, sex-crazed
maniac.”

Jim chuckled and nodded his head in a knowing way. “Well
then, I have to assume that my looks didn’t scare you too much.”

Her eyes diverted to the rim of the glass that the bartender
brought over for her in a somewhat embarrassed fashion. “I’m
sorry. I just never did anything like this before and didn’t know
what to expect.”

“No apologies necessary. If you were my cousin, I wouldn’t
want you to take any chances either. I’m glad you used your head,
but you still don’t know whether I’m a nut case or not,” Jim of-
fered.

“Now that I have seen you, and I couple that with all of the
conversations we’ve had, I feel pretty comfortable. You are a
very attractive man. And I know you’re a good man. I was just ap-
prehensive, and now I’m not,” she said softly. ”

There was music playing softly as they continued to get to
know one another better. Suddenly, half way through an explana-
tion of the repairs her car had undergone in the past week, she
stopped and asked Jim if he would like to dance. Jim readily
agreed and they approached the dance floor. As she preceded him,
Jim couldn’t help but to notice the rise and fall of each but-
tock. He felt his manhood stir once again. The red material rose
and fell as the ripple of each cheek pushed and pulled at the
fabric.

Having arrived at the small space offered for dancing,
Marilyn turned and opened her arms to receive Jim. He could see
her breasts rise to accentuate her cleavage. Her scent continued
to arouse him. His hands encircled her lovely body and were
blessed by the soft touch. She didn’t waste any time getting
close to Jim. Her curves melted into his body as they moved to
the music. Marilyn pressed her ample breasts against his chest,
and he could feel the heat of her pussy against his leg. It
seemed as though she was trying to turn him on. Well, whether or
not she was trying, it was happening.

It became obvious to Marilyn that Jim was getting excited.
His cock began to grow thick and long. He felt it pressing
against his clothing almost to the point of embarrassment. He was
intoxicated with the fact that as his thick cock grew, Marilyn
was pressing herself harder against it. His courage grew with
this thought, and he allowed his hand to drop to Marilyn’s full
buttocks. He smoothed the material of her dress and returned to
the flesh of her ass to squeeze. As he did, a soft moan escaped
Marilyn’s lips and her pussy pressed against him once again. Soon
the music came to an end, and they were forced to separate.

Jim began to show signs of embarrassment as they returned to
the bar, and then his pride took over. He hoped that some of the
other patrons saw his rock-hard cock as he returned. He was proud
of it. Marilyn stopped abruptly as they returned, and Jim ran
into her tight ass with his erection. She looked over her
shoulder and smiled. “I just wanted to make sure that you were
still there.”

After they took their seats Jim indicated that it might be
nice if they were able to go someplace that would be a little bit
more private. Marilyn agreed. They finished their drinks, and Jim
pulled her chair out so they could exit.

“The kids are at my mom’s, and I would love it if you would
come over for a while Jim,” Marilyn offered.

“Are you sure it won’t be any problem?” Jim inquired. Im-
mediately he knew that he should have merely said that he would
love to. Why would he take a chance like that? She might have
re-thought the matter.

“No. It’s not a problem. I’m anxious to learn more about
hypnosis and your adventures. It’s pretty obvious that you have
become rather proficient at snake charming,” she offered with a
cute smile as her eyes riveted on the front of his trousers.

After assisting Marilyn into her car, Jim got into his and
followed her. His mind was racing. He couldn’t remember the last
time that someone turned him on this much. He could almost see
her dress rising over her head as she removed it for his intrud-
ing gaze. He thought of her lovely buns, draped with only the
sheerest of panties. He envisioned her soft pubic hairs furtively
escaping the edge of her sex-soaked panties. He could smell her
womanhood as her excitement increased. He wanted to make this
woman part of him.

Marilyn interrupted his mental adventure as she pulled into
a driveway. Christ! He didn’t even know which street he was on.
His mind had obviously been elsewhere. He felt his heart begin-
ning to beat more rapidly as he put his car in park and extin-
guished his lights. After a quick check in the mirror to make
sure that his hair didn’t look like a squirrel he was out of the
car and walking behind this lovely creature.

She fitted the key into the lock and looked back over her
shoulder in an inviting manner. Marilyn lowered her coat to a
waiting chair and told Jim to make himself at home. “I think a
drink would be in order. Why don’t you see if you can put some
nice music on. The CD’s are right next to the player.”

“You must enjoy classical music. Three quarters of what you
have is classical,” Jim raised his voice to assure that Marilyn
heard him. He selected several pieces, placed them into the CD
changer and pushed the play button. Looking around the room, he
was gratified to see that Marilyn’s taste extended to her lovely
furnishings. Soon she returned with a bottle of wine and two
glasses.

“I’ve always been partial to classical music Jim. I think
you’ll enjoy this wine. It’s kind of hard to come by ’round these
parts partner,” she teased with a country drawl as she seated
herself close to him. “Now how does this hypnosis work that you
have talked so much about?”

Jim explained that almost anything was possible with the use
of hypnosis if the subject had the ability. The ability generally
was referred to as somnambulism. Many people were very suggest-
ible and could achieve wonderful results through hypnosis.

“What kind of results Jim?” was her next question as she
moved closer yet to him. He seemed to be trying to formulate an
answer but encountered difficulty due to the closeness of her
soft ample breasts.

“You can be anyone you want. You can be with anyone you want
to be with. You can be anywhere you want to be and feel as you
wish for as long as you can physically stand it,” he explained as
his arm encircled her shoulders.

“If I wanted to be with you, on a secluded beach, in the hot
sun, with gulls overhead and waves lapping at the shore, could
you make that happen?” she questioned with interest.

“I really can’t make anything happen for you Marilyn. You
actually make what happens occur. Each of us has the ability, to
one degree or another, to hypnotize ourselves. I would only be
helping you through the process you don’t quite understand,” Jim
explained.

“Let’s give it our best shot Jim. I would like to experience
the scenario just as I outlined it. I want to be with you. I want
it to be great and I want it to last,” Marilyn pleaded.

Jim took her through various relaxation stages and success-
fully helped her to a deep trance state. He indicated to her that
they had been marooned on a dessert island and that on a portable
radio they heard that a rescue party was two days away from
bringing them back to civilization. It would be night time and a
nice camp fire had been built. When he snapped his fingers once,
it would soon be daylight and the sun would be glorious; they
would be totally alone. He gave her the suggestion that they had
been attracted to one another during their sea voyage but hadn’t
the opportunity to connect.

He further gave her a suggestion that she hadn’t had sex in
over six months and that she was absolutely insane with desire.
Even if she masturbated she could not quench her thirst for sex.
Jim told her that at the count of three she would awaken, find
herself on an old boat seat that washed ashore and be a little
cold from the night winds blowing off the water.

She would experience a desire unlike she ever felt before.
Each time she had an orgasm, it would take violent hold of her
and last three times longer that she had ever experienced before.
Her nipples would be so sensitive that she would shudder with the
least touch. When she placed his cock in her mouth she would feel
this intense pressure on her clitoris. The deeper she placed his
rigid penis in her throat, the more intense the feeling in her
hole would be.

Jim asked her if she understood everything that he told her,
and she acknowledged that she had with a nod of her head. He also
told her that when he placed her head between his hands and
kissed her on the forehead, she would awaken, feel wonderful and
more satisfied than she had ever felt before. The next time that
he snapped his fingers twice, while looking into her eyes, she
would fall into a fast, deep sleep. So he began, “one, two,
three.”

Marilyn sat on the couch that she perceived to be the boat
seat. She had an utterly lost look on her face. Her arms crossed
her chest in an effort to ward off the cold. She sheepishly in-
quired, “do you think we will be OK until they arrive Jim?”

“I’m sure we will be just fine. I don’t think there are any
dangerous animals on the prowl, I have built a nice fire and it
will be daylight soon,” he said.

“Would you mind if I get out of these wet things and try to
warm myself by the fire Jim. I’m a little embarrassed, but I
don’t want to get pneumonia,” she pleaded shyly.

Jim could only nod his consent. He had been waiting to see
this lovely body all of his life. Marilyn got up and turned so
that he could release her zipper. She removed the red dress, and
Jim noticed the visible goose flesh as she did so. He had ob-
viously helped her attain temperature hallucination. She was ac-
tually chilly. Jim went over to a near-by arm chair and retrieved
an afghan to place around her. By this time she had removed her
bra but modestly kept her back to Jim. He placed the afghan
around her shivering shoulders and drew her to him.

Marilyn melted back into his arms and could feel his meat
pressed against her warming buttocks. He felt her fumble a little
and turn to look into his eyes. “You have been so very kind to
me. This is absolutely frightening not knowing exactly when they
will come for us,” Marilyn whispered.

Jim eased her down on the “boat seat” and gathered her to
him to increase her warmth. His nose was blessed with the scent
of her hair and the warmth of her body. Again their eyes met. Her
mouth opened ever so slightly as her eyes began to close. Closer
and closer their lips came to touching. At last he could feel her
hot breath bleeding into his own lungs; a kiss of gratitude
turned quickly into a kiss of passion and need. The afghan fell
from her shoulders.

Moments later his strong hands were on her body. Touching
softly and moving on. Her back flexed as his hands moved slowly
up and down its spine resting on her buttocks. She considered
stopping, but she couldn’t make herself. Her own hands began to
experiment with the muscles of his body. She felt them ripple to
her touch as a soft moan escaped his lips. This slight sound lit
off lovely explosions in her head. His hands were on her thighs
touching every inch as softly as an angel’s kiss. She knew she
was wet with anticipation and hunger. Uncontrollably, her hand
soon found the hardness of the staff in his pants. Her control
was gone and she didn’t care.

His hands were under her heavy breasts cupping and teasing
her ripe, hard nipples. Once when she was a child she experienced
a fever that was accompanied by a shivering phenomenon. As his
fingers touched her dark pink nipples, this experience was
relived. She began to press her wet, hairy mound into the seat
for some simple relief from the mounting frustration. His tongue
was on her neck tracing love notes. It then moved to her heaving
swollen breasts.

She felt teeth and lips on her blood-engorged nipples. Again
a shivering took control of her body, and ripples of excitement
thundered through her body. His hand traveled down to that moist,
fragrant hole of her womanhood. Explosions went off in her head
as his hand crept inside her panties to feel her slippery cunt.
He inserted one finger inside her body and then another. In cir-
cular motions he soon brought her to heaven. The bone shaking
convulsions continued on and on. She had never experienced such
an orgasm. Would there never be an end to this joy? She prayed
there would not. Her jerking and moaning brought yet additional
growth to his throbbing cock.

As if drawn by a magnet, her lips traversed the distance be-
tween his hairy chest and his huge staff. Soon she brought that
gentle monster inside she mouth and teased it with delight. He
was bone hard and bursting with excitement. Her soft mouth sucked
him deep inside to her waiting throat. Something was happening to
her. Up and down went her hungry mouth as her tongue gave him yet
new pleasures. She couldn’t seem to get enough of this warrior
spear into her throat. Deeper and deeper she sucked the huge cock
into her mouth until her lips brushed the depths of his public
wire. With each inch her moans grew in volume and intensity.

His head was spinning as he whispered in her ear that he had
never had such tender bliss. The heat rising from her cunt was
quite amazing. He took her swollen sex lips in his mouth and
sucked and nibbled for minutes, his tongue teasing and probing.
All the while, one of his hands was squeezing her buttocks with
such strength it doubled her excitement. His other hand gently
twisted one of her hard nipples. He sucked her sweet love juice
and drank from her wriggling body, swallowing the divine cream
with animal-like relish.

Her soft pussy was going into spasms now, and he felt the
muscles in her vagina grab for his teasing tongue as he lanced it
into her tense body. Her smooth, rounded hips were jerking up and
down as she attempted to shove as much cunt into his mouth as she
possible could. Spreading her legs wide apart, he raised her but-
tocks in his hands and kissed at her dripping fanny, his nose
completely buried and lost in the dark, springy hairs of her
mound.

The lips of her sweet cunt were now spread very wide apart,
in a way that completely exposed her deep, hot cavern, the soft
lips of her slit parting and pulsing with desire. The pinkish
flesh gleamed with her love juice, which trickled and oozed down
her tunnel and greased everything ready for the fuck that she was
dying for.

Taking his fat, throbbing weapon in both hands, he took the
tip and rubbed it all over the slippery opening of her slit,
smearing it with her juices. She had the look of a hungry animal.
She didn’t want fucked any longer; she needed it. Lowering him-
self on her body, he slid seven inches of cock into her eager
hole. Her cunt swallowed every hot, steaming inch of it, the
membranes inside her gripped his penis as he rammed it deeper and
deeper into the liquid cauldron. The walls of her inner cunt con-
tracted tightly around this invading rod.

This deprived love tunnel seemed to quiver and clutch,
enclosing the unyielding bulk of his cock in a loving grasp. The
tip of his prick was pressing against her cavity. He enjoyed the
depth of penetration for a few seconds more then grunted with
pleasure as her vaginal muscles squeezed his cock in a milking
action. In a motion that didn’t dislodge his towering piston, he
swung her over and placed her above him. Her heavy glistening
breasts swayed in his pleasure-filled face. His tongue reached up
to thank each rock-hard nipple in its own way for presenting such
an erotic view.

He began to see-saw in and out of her as she began to lever
herself up and down the long, thick pole which impaled her. Her
juices were soaking her pubic hair and the slopping, slushing,
slurping sounds from her clasping cunt were erotic music to their
ears. As she cried for it he bucked his hips even faster, match-
ing her up and down motion, her belly smacking against his with
audible slaps of flesh as she clung to him. He hung on to her,
trying to steady her, staring avidly at her bouncing tits when
she pulled away to view the penetration. A wail of ecstasy ripped
from her mouth as the violent explosion of her climax pushed
through the membranes of her passion pit, milking his cock with
the loving vise of her wet sheath.

With one last frantic thrust, his cock exploded; shooting
his cream in a steady stream of fantastic release. She had never
had such excitement. It was new, wonderful and needed. It went on
and on with such convulsive pleasure that she was sure she would
pass out. She could have easily taken more of what that cock
promised. Jim snapped his fingers, and Marilyn saw the bright
orange sun rise over a sleepy horizon. Around her were the
loveliest trees she had ever seen. Sea gulls sang sweet melodies
as she closed her eyes and welcomed the heat of a new tropical
day.

Jim gently placed his hands around her resting face and
kissed her on the forehead. He told her to awake and remember
everything. This was one of the most wonderful times he had ever
had, and he was sure that Marilyn was pleased with the outcome.
The most wondrous thing about it was the fact that another
pleasure trip was just a snap of the fingers away. Maybe next
weekend.

CHAPTER THREE – MIND SEX

“You are now more deeply asleep than you have ever been.
Your body is weightless and seems to float among the clouds. You
can’t feel your arms or legs. All tension has bled from your
muscles, and you are at complete peace. You are traveling down an
escalator. As the moments pass, you are going deeper and deeper
into a warm and satisfying trance. You feel more safe and com-
fortable than you ever have.

“Am I correct when I say that you are interested in mentally
living through a fantasy as a spy in Russia?” Jim inquired of his
subject Maggie.

“Yesss. I want to live my fantasy of being a sexy fem fatale
sent into Russia to extract secrets from a Russian munitions
scientist. I want it to be the sexiest and more exciting ex-
perience of my life,” Maggie explained in a slow, far-away voice.

Jim continued, “You have been sent to Russia under the
pretense of developing trade between the U.S.A. and the Soviet
Union. You work for World Trade Developers in Moscow. You are the
sexiest woman in the city. You have been moving in the upper
crust society of the Soviet Union in an effort to promote
products for the United States and surreptitiously obtain the
plans for a powerful laser weapon for your government.

“You are at a cocktail party sponsored by the Kremlin to
enhance new markets of world trade. Around you are hundreds of
people, many of which you are sure work for the K.G.B. You have
to be careful. If your cover is blown, you will have your own
personal tour of Siberia.

“You have just met Aleksei Vladimirovich a week ago, a supe-
rior looking young man of thirty-five years of age. You are
hoping that you will see him at this party. The intelligence net-
work assures you that Vladimirovich has top security clearance,
and the plans for the laser weapon are at his flat.

“Alex, as you affectionately refer to him, is very well
built, 6′4″, 210 pounds, works out every day and has a face that
looks like it was chiseled out of marble. His hair is blond and
his eyes are a deep azure blue. He showed a great deal of inter-
est in you last week when you were at his office on another mat-
ter. You can imagine the size of his cock by the lovely bulge
resting in his trousers, and you are grateful for the opportunity
to work on this project.

“You glide through the room in your well-fitted sapphire
blue dress. It clings to you, accenting your lovely breasts and
rolling buttocks. Every person’s eyes are on you, and each step
you take excites you more. You are casually looking for Alex as
you enjoy the attention that both men and women are showering you
with. Your eye catches a glimpse of him standing on the other
side of the room speaking with a beautiful young Russian girl.
Your heart sinks to think that your plans may be delayed by this
union.

“Jorgi, a chemical engineer for one of the companies you
have been dealing with, asks you to dance. Your eyes remain glued
to Alex and his conversation partner as you agree to dance with
Jorgi. If he is not a strong dance leader, you may be able to
sway him closer to Alex to overhear his conversation. Jorgi is a
strong young man with more than a casual interest in you. It
feels good to be in his arms and feel his body against yours. You
can feel yourself responding to the excitement you feel from him
as your bodies move more closely together with the soft music.

“Jorgi holds your breasts close to his chest with his hot
hand at the curve of your soft hip. Gradually his left leg moves
between your legs to feel the heat of your womanhood. All the
while you are moving closer to Alex with ease, as Jorgi’s mind is
preoccupied with the feel of your soft yielding body. You can
feel new strength and size as Jorgi’s growing, climbing staff
kisses your leg in its travels upward. You are finding it in-
creasingly more difficult to concentrate on Alex’s conversation.
Jorgi’s stiff penis is not shy. It has become a hard wad of male
meat nestled in your tightening belly.

“Your concentration holds; you are a professional, and you
are encouraged that your ability to control is increasing. The
music ends, and Jorgi doesn’t seem to want to let go of you. He
asks if he can call you from time to time in his broken, but sexy
English. You assure him that it would be wonderful to hear from
him and notice that Alex is looking at you. You try not to give
Jorgi the ‘bum’s rush’ but can’t take the chance of Alex direct-
ing his attention elsewhere. ‘Excuse me,’ you direct to Jorgi, ‘I
have to speak with Alex. Please do call, I’d love to see you
again’ as you walk casually toward Alex.

“A server walks by with a tray of champagne and offers a
glass. You take the drink as a prop and find that you are a bit
thirsty. Suddenly the glass is empty. ‘Has champagne glass with
hole in it for you?’ Alex queried with his version of English.

“You offer your best seductive smile as you respond, ‘I sup-
pose the warmth of the night has joined hands with the majesty of
your lovely country to dry out the old pipes.’ Alex looks at you
with confusion about what your answer means. ‘Yes,’ you simplify,
‘I was very thirsty. The glass was with hole in it for me,’ you
smile.

“Now, at the count of three, you will wake up and be with
Alex in his car. He has graciously offered to escort you to your
hotel room. You will try to convince him that it would be better
to go elsewhere. You must get into his flat. When he snaps his
fingers once, you will be alone with him in his flat.

“You are beginning to feel more sexy than you ever have
before. Your senses are heightened, and every touch will send
waves of sensuous excitement through your body. You know that you
must give Alex more pleasure than he has known in order to escape
with the secrets you have come for. If Alex puts his tongue in
the crook of your neck and his penis is inside your body, you
will feel his cock grow inside of you. It will expand to a full
ten inches in length, stretching the walls of your hot cunt, and
two and a half inches in girth pressing the sensitive lips of
your womanhood outward. Each time his tongue enters your body,
you will have a small climax. You can have hundreds of orgasms.
When he holds your face in his hands, looks into your eyes and
kisses you on the forehead, you will fall back into a deep sleep
but you will remember everything when you do wake up. Do you
understand?”

“Yes, I understand,” she said in the far-away voice of the
sleeping.

Jim began, “One, two, three. Wake up feeling sexier than you
ever have before. You are hot and mysterious and bursting with
excitement.”

“Alex, it was good of you to offer to take me home, but
there are so many people at my hotel that will tease me if I show
up with you. You know how cruel fellow workers can be. Would you
mind if we went someplace else instead?” Maggie asked in a plead-
ing fashion with her cleavage giving yet additional messages.

“You would want for to go to Aleksei’s flat? I have wonder-
ful musik and compelling wine. We will get knowing each another
more best. And crowds make uncomfortable most for me also,” Alex
commented in his sexiest voice as his hand rested provocatively
on Maggie’s upper thigh.

“That would be great Alex. It’s early and we have the whole
night to get to know each other better. Drive on,” Maggie sug-
gested with a hungry smile.”

“Alex” snapped his fingers and they were in his flat. “I
will put musik to play and get blood of grape for I and you,” Jim
played the part with no little relish. “Make comfortable and
relax yourself.” Maggie’s eyes began photographing the room, not
forgetting that in addition to her building lust, she must find
the plans for the laser weapon.

Maggie watched Jim’s muscles ripple as he walked across the
room. He felt her eyes glued to him everywhere he walked. Jim
knew that his body was merely average and that Maggie didn’t see
it as average. He knew that with her mind she was able to make
“Alex” look anyway that she wanted him to look. She would ob-
viously make him look great. Her libido was working overtime, and
the heat developing in the center of loins only served to improve
the situation. Jim’s cock began to tingle, and he developed a
heaviness in his groin that would require release before too
long.

Maggie soon began to tingle all over her throbbing body. The
excitement of what she hoped would soon happen sent shivers
through her beautiful body. Jim left the room, went down the hall
and returned in a pair of sweat pants and sweat shirt with the
sleeves removed. There was some writing on the shirt, but she
couldn’t figure out what it said. The music began to play softly
as he returned with a tray of wine with two glasses. The cork was
removed, and he poured two half glasses; seating himself next to
Maggie, he offered a glass to her extended hand.

With little time having passed, the empty glasses found
their respective place on the huge, glass-topped cocktail table
and Maggie found herself in Alex’s arms. She offered her lips to
his hungry mouth, and the tingling increased dramatically. Her
fingers and hands painted his arms and chest with a fervor as her
lust continued to build. Shivers drove through her as his fingers
began to release the buttons to her “sapphire blue dress.” She
felt the material tease her soft shoulders and back as it was
slowly drawn over her skin. With a snap maneuver that surprised
her, her bra fell away in one motion exposing her undulating
breasts and erect nipples to Alex’s gaze and touch. The heat in
her brain became almost unbearable. ‘Fuck, Fuck, Fuck’ were the
only words repeated in her mind.

She began envisioning the muscles of his strong ass flexing
as he drove his bone deep into her wet sheath. She imagined the
hair surrounding his erect staff mingling with her own pubic gar-
den as the rain of the combined love juices served to grease
their journey to eruption. She could see the tip of his engorged
fuck tool, glowing with her pussy juice; a huge purple knob rest-
ing atop a thick, rigid pole adorned with bulging veins feeding
the strength and length of his hardness. She could feel the
weight of his hairy balls on her tight anal button, glistening
with the milk of her natural lubrication. She could see the hair
lying deep and low in the crack between her wiggling buttocks;
wet and clinging as he drove his cock meat into the center of her
being.

As Jim moved his hands to and from heaving tits, rigid
nipples, glistening buttocks and wet cavern, his mind also embel-
lished the moments and searched for erotic sights, sounds and
smells. He could imagine her hands gently cradling his hairy cum
nuts. He could feel her lips begin to move on his throbbing,
straining penis. First she teased; soon she devoured his broad
column.

The time for imagining was gone. Jim ran his tongue from one
nipple to another circling each and gently nipping at each. Down
between the cleft of her wiggling titties his tongue traveled.
Down her stomach the wet tongue set fires until it rested in her
panting navel. His teeth bared themselves and bit at her hip
bones sending new shivers up and down her spine as his hands
filled with the fleshy meat of her tight buttocks. Closer and
closer his mouth moved toward her feminine, and fragrant hole.

Bang! Jim’s tongue entered Maggie’s love tunnel and she
began to quiver in climax. She had never felt anything quite like
this. It wasn’t a roaring, earth-shaking orgasm. It was as if she
had been plugged into and electrical outlet. She could feel
electric shocks traveling between her pussy, her ass hole and her
marble-hard nipples and back again. It came again, and again, and
again. She became dizzy and drove her fuck box against Jim’s
intruding face. After the first few jolts, Maggie began trying to
count the eruptions to herself. ‘One, two, three, four, fiiiive,
holy shit, that was a great one, six, seven, eiggggg, Oh fuck,
can it get better than this?’ Maggie wondered.

Jim withdrew his tongue and turned her over. His tongue
moved slowly up the back of her thighs, nipping at the taunt back
of her knees. Painting the back of her thighs with his saliva,
Jim soon drove his tongue into the crack of her ass. Maggie threw
her ass up in the air, and Jim’s tongue drove deep into her cunt
hole once again. Bang! Another electric shock fired through her
wiggling frame. Teasing it’s way up Maggie’s back, Jim’s tongue
played on her shoulder blades and dipped into her glistening arm
pits. She could now feel his hard meat resting in the gully be-
tween the balls of her ass cheeks. She knew she needed that bone
deep in her guts.

Now Maggie took the offensive. Pushing Jim over to lie on
his back, she was on him with hands and tongue. Licking his swol-
len balls, she saw his huge staff grow again. Her hand stroked
his love pole, and she saw the fluid begin to come to the tip of
his lust weapon. Her hungry eyes danced from rippling belly, to
hairy chest, to the purple tip of his spear. In one motion his
cock was driven deep into her throat. It was stopped when it met
resistance from the throat muscles, but only briefly. Given the
chance to adjust, her throat opened even further, and the cock
finished its journey and was embedded deep in her throat. She had
taken it all, and her lips rested in his wiry public hair. Driv-
ing it in and out gave Jim a wonderful sensation as the head of
his cock was systematically squeezed and released by the involun-
tary muscles of her throat. He would soon cum if he didn’t stop
now, and he wanted to squirt his load into Maggie’s hot pussy.

Turning her over in one quick motion, Jim spread her legs to
expose her soaked honey pot. Resting on his knees, he lowered his
face once again to her pit. Bang! The shock provided yet addi-
tional orgasms. She drove her hot pussy against his face like a
crazed animal, grunting and crying, “Oh fuck, fuck me, fuck my
deep hole, spread my hairy cunt and fuck it deep. Shove your
great cum stick into my quim and dump your hot load.”

“No! I want to see you play with your body. I want to see
you fuck yourself and pinch your hard nipples. I want to see you
finger fuck your hole and cum for me,” Jim insisted.

“Don’t make me wait, Alex. I need your cock in my hole. I
need you to squeeze my ass cheeks as you drive your thick cock
into my pussy. Please!” Maggie begged.

“Do it baby! Show me your beautiful titties. Pinch your
rock-hard nipples. Dig in your hole with your hand and show me
how you are going to cum hard for me. Show me how much you want
my bone in your hole,” Jim demanded as she began to moan and
comply with his demands.

Maggie filled her hands with her own heavy, yet firm breasts
and squeezed hard. Filling her hands with tit flesh, she offered
her raised and tight nipples to Jim’s glance. Sliding her hands
toward the center of each breast, she grabbed each nipple between
forefinger and thumb and began to pinch and roll the puckered
nipple flesh. This sent waves of additional excitement through
her lust-racked body.

Her hips began to bounce on the bed as if there was an im-
aginary cock driving deep inside of her. Releasing one ripe
nipple, her hand traveled down her stomach, pressing as it went
to delve into her waiting, wet bush. Nervous fingers separate the
lips of her cunt hole to cover them with the slick juice of her
desire. Jim watched as her glistening fingers moved to her love
button, pinching and pulling she was forced to grunt deeply and
begin shaking her breast with her other hand.

Releasing her clit, her middle finger slipped effortlessly
into her wet cunt. She began pumping this single digit in and
out. Soon a second finger was introduced to the hot cavern, and
then a third. Deeper and deeper she drove her hand into her
steaming cunt. She released her other breast and used the other
hand to help pump her womanhood and furiously rub her clit. As
both hands were centered mindlessly on her loins, her breasts
were squeezed together as two huge mounds of shaking flesh
adorned by hot pink nipples reaching for the ceiling. Jim’s hand
continued to slowly stroke his organ as he watched Maggie pound-
ing her pussy deeply. He was positioned between her outstretched
legs and she was beginning to climax. Her beautiful face
tightened as her lips were pulled taunt across it. Her eyes were
closed tightly, leaving wrinkles to frame them. The tendons in
her neck rose as if straining to keep her head on her shoulders.
Her head twisted back and forth, from side to side.

Reaching toward her, Jim grabbed her wet hands and placed
them against his lips. He tasted this woman and smelled the
fragrance of her orgasm. If only he could bottle this scent!
Moving to one side of her, Jim rolled her over. He began massag-
ing the muscles of her back to reduce the tension she had built
up. His hands found her rubbery ass cheeks and deeply moved these
mounds of flesh. Maggie began to moan once again. He massaged the
muscles of her neck and began kissing her ear lobes and neck. She
began to stir again.

Jim placed one of his knees between her legs into the wet
pit of her hot snatch and continued to rub her back. Ever-so-
slowly, Maggie began grinding her groin into his hard knee and
thigh. Jim pressed ahead as his eyes were blessed with the vision
of her buttocks wrapped around his leg and the sides of her
breasts pushed out by the pressure of the mounds resting on the
bed.

Turning her over once again, Jim laid next to her and kissed
her gently on her hot lips. His lips traveled to her resting
nipples bringing them to life again. He again placed himself be-
tween her legs and kissed her navel. Soon his face was resting
over her fragrant pussy. Bang! His tongue dove into her depths
and sent her convulsing again. Before Maggie knew what was hap-
pening, Jim fell forward in one motion and his dick effortlessly
found its mark. It was deep inside of Maggie’s grasping cunt but
it remained motionless. She tried to move under his weight to
drive the pole in and out, but Jim did not move. He nuzzled his
nose into the crook of her neck and allowed his tongue to dart
against her skin.

With this move, Maggie felt something she did not know she
could feel. “Alex” had a great cock. It must be eight inches in
length and two inches wide. However, it was growing. She could
feel it getting longer and spreading her cunt lips farther apart.
She felt as if she would explode, but didn’t care if she did.
When Jim’s cock has reached it’s full “ten inches in length and
two and a half inches in girth,” Maggie felt completely full of
cock. Jim now began to move this monster pole into Maggie’s
depths. Each stroke seemed to bring another climax. She didn’t
know anyone could fit this much fuck bone into a cunt no matter
how big or lubricated it was.

Jim continued to move his raging penis into Maggie’s love
tunnel until he could hold off no longer. He could feel the cum
boiling in his balls. The feeling was so intense that he thought
that he could feel the cum traveling from the bottom of his legs
and from his very brain. He reached under Maggie and filled his
hands with her quaking ass cheeks as his cock continued to drive
deep into her being. Her breasts and belly were now soaked with
his perspiration and covered with his dislodged hair as he lifted
himself to watch his glistening penis drive into Maggie’s body.
Her grunts resembled those of an animal driven by primordial
lust.

Jim’s cock exploded with one wave after another. His thick
cream came in gobs painting the walls of Maggie’s greasy cunt.
She could feel the overflow of cum pressing out of her hole
around his shaft, flowing down and cooling her hot ass hole. She
continued to buck hard against Jim, pulling his thick cock into
her with her heals pounding his flexing ass muscles.

Maggie’s explosion was so intense that she either passed out
or lost her sight for a short time. She could see nothing with
her eyes, but the vision of Jim’s hard driving cock was burned
into her mind’s eye. As her ecstasy subsided, she laid there and
continued to feel tingling throughout her spent body. Jim
couldn’t or did not want to move.

He was almost asleep when he sensed Maggie moving about the
room. ‘Shit! He thought to himself. She is probably trying to
find the plans. I better not let this go any farther. “Maggie!
Did you need something?” Jim inquired.

“No Alex. I was just looking for a towel,” she responded as
she returned to the side of the bed.

“Sit here next to me for a moment,” Jim requested patting
the bed next to him. She sat but looked a bit nervous. Jim placed
his hands on either side of her face, looked into her eyes and
kissed her on the forehead. Maggie melted back onto the bed and
fell into a deep sleep once again. “You have found the plans
while Alex was sleeping, dressed and slipped out of the flat
without being detected. You are now safely away, back in your own
country, feeling wonderful and well rested. When I snap my
fingers you will begin to wake up slowly and remember everything
that happened. Do you understand?”

Again, the far away response of “yes” came from her lips.
She was lovely laying there on the bed. Jim was reluctant to wake
her up because she looked so peaceful and angelic.

Time was getting late, and Jim knew that Maggie would want
to get tidied up. Snapping his fingers, Jim said gently, “wake up
now feeling refreshed and comfortable. Maggie opened her eyes
slowly and allowed her glance to travel the room. Her glance
finally rested on Jim at the side of the bed.

“That was absolutely the most exciting time I’ve even spent.
I have never been that hot, and I know I never came that many
times in a month. Thank you so much for teaching me a great deal
about myself and my own sexuality, Jim. Promise me we will take
other trips together,” she pleaded.

“Trips are my specialty Maggie. If you have the gas, I can
drive. I too enjoyed it more than I can say. Jorgi did feel a
little left out. Maybe you’ll have a chance to spend some time
with him in the future. I plan to teach you how to accomplish
that with or without me. But that’ll be another story,” Jim con-
cluded with a smile.

CHAPTER FOUR – MIND SEX

It was Sunday evening, and Jim was tripping through the
channels with his trusty remote. Low and behold, Captain James T.
Kirk of the Starship Enterprise was listening to Bones explaining
that he was a doctor and not a miracle worker. Spock was sharp-
ening his ears to deal with the next catastrophe, and it dawned
on Jim that one of his computer correspondent pals was a Sci Fi
aficionado.

Jim had the opportunity to communicate frequently with her
over the phone lines, through the computer, but had never met
her. Her computer handle was Star; not an uncommon name for a Sci
Fi buff. He had seen a photo of her, that he downloaded in what
is referred to as a GIF format; a digitized representation of a
photo that has been scanned into a computer. The photo was, as
she suggested, somewhat old, but all of the same characteristics
must still be present. She was an exciting-looking woman sporting
shoulder length brown hair, a lovely smile, large breasts and a
well-defined waist. Her wit assured Jim that she was someone that
he would enjoy being with.

She had indicated some interest in hypnosis, but said that
it had been tried before with her to no avail. Further, she
shared that she had a very vivid imagination and did love sex a
great deal. Her main interest was in satisfying her partner.
“Would you be willing to have me try working with you one day to
determine if you have the ability to go into a trance?” Jim asked
during one of their frequent conversations.

“Well, I think we have gotten to know one another well
enough. I wouldn’t be opposed to it, but I really don’t think
that it will do any good. Do you think Thursday will be good for
you,” she asked.

“I don’t think I have anything pressing. I’ll double check
and leave a message for you on the system. Just leave your ad-
dress and the time you want me to show up. If there’s a problem,
I’ll let you know, and we can make it another time,” Jim urged.

Star’s mind began to question. ‘Wouldn’t it be great to make
love in a space ship? I wonder what kind of a guy this Jim really
is? Could I really be hypnotized? I wonder how it would feel to
have a Romulan’s thick cock inside of me? Does a Romulan have a
cock?’ The questions continued to flow with no distinct result in
mind. The thought of it, none-the-less was making her horny. She
hoped that Thursday would bring some interesting answers.

Jim returned home from the office and turned on his com-
puter. In only seconds he was on line with the bulletin board
system and found that there was a message for him. His eyes lit
up when he saw that Star had left him the information about her
address, general directions and the time of eight o’clock. He im-
mediately keyed in the information advising her that the date and
time were fine, and that he would be happy to be there.

Method would be the difficulty. Jim knew that if Star was
intelligent and had a vivid imagination, she should be very sus-
ceptible to hypnosis. Her problem was likely that no one took
enough time to relax her sufficiently to allow the suggestions to
do their work. Jim had devised a method that had worked several
times in the past and would introduce Star to it when they met.

Thursday arrived and Jim started to drive over to Star’s
house. He was about fifteen minutes early so he decided to just
ride about the neighborhood. At 8:00 o’clock he drew together the
courage to approach Star’s door. After a brief wait the door
opened to reveal a lovely woman with a warm smile and look of
slight apprehension. “Jim?” she asked, wondering if this could be
her previously unseen friend. A wordless smile assured her that
this was indeed Jim, and she invited him to enter. “Please made
yourself comfortable, Jim. I thought I would get us a drink.
Would you like a glass of white wine?, she queried.

“That would be great Star; but please don’t go to any
trouble,” Jim pleaded in his best manner. He walked into the
living room and settled in what appeared to be a comfortable
chair. Soon Star returned with a tray bearing a bottle of chilled
wine, a cork screw and two stemmed glasses. He couldn’t help but
to notice her warm body as it swayed into the room. She appealed
to him in several respects. He already knew that she had a
pleasant enough personality, and now he saw that she was also
physically appealing. “Would you like to begin right away, Star?”
he asked.

“Whenever you’re ready, Jim,” she responded. Jim asked her
to pour herself a glass of wine and have a seat in a comfortable
chair. She did so and selected a chair close to Jim. She sipped
on the wine and leaned back to become comfortable. Jim slowly
took her through a series of relaxation exercises and noticed
that she was making fine progress. He decided to deepen the
trance and see what happened. She was indeed imaginative and
seemed to be a good subject. The trance was deepened once again.
She was mentally brought down deeper and deeper by visualizing an
escalator reaching to the depths of her mind. Jim could see the
muscles of her body begin to relax as she sunk into the chair.

“You are now in a deeper sleep than you have ever been
before, Star. You are a very sensual woman, and you can feel
yourself tingling all over. There is a warmth spreading
throughout your lovely body, teasing your full breasts and paint-
ing your womanhood. It merely serves to make you more comfortable
and relaxed. You have often shared an interest in Science Fic-
tion. I am going to take you on a journey that will enable you to
experience things that you have never felt before. From time to
time you will perceive yourself to be in danger, but I stress
that at no time will I allow anything to happen to you. If at any
time you become too concerned, you may fall into a natural sleep
and awaken slowly; unafraid and well rested. You are not com-
pelled to do anything against your will. If you encounter any-
thing that you are uncomfortable with, feel free to share that
with me. Do you understand?” Jim asked. Star nodded slowly, and
Jim continued.

“You will become the character in this story, and you will
see, hear and feel everything that the character does.

“Star finds herself in a strange land. There are colors she
has never seen, sounds she’s never heard and smells that have
never touched her senses. There is an abundance of lovely trees
and flowers that blend to offer her eyes the most wondrous gift.
She can hear a waterfall close by and smell the moisture in the
air. Her heart is racing in anticipation of what experience she
may meet.

“She is science officer and has just ridden a light beam to
this strange planet’s surface. Star is under orders of the Cap-
tain of the vessel which has brought her to this strange globe.
She is on a mission to discover if there exists intelligent life
on this planet. She looks about and sees Maagnex, a citizen of
Szinval. Earth and Szinval have entered into an alliance of joint
adventure to search the galaxy for other potential allies in
their common battle against an evil galactic empire. Maagnex is
neither man nor woman. Szinvalites have the ability to self
reproduce and re-generate themselves.

“As she exchanges wary glances with her new partner, sud-
denly she sees a slow flash of bluish energy strike Maagnex
squarely in the chest. It drops to the reddish ground, and she
immediately pulls her ultra-sound weapon. Her eyes flash from
colorful rock to unrecognized tree in an effort to locate the
source of the assassin. She sees movement to the left, and
quickly turns and trains her weapon on the area of movement. A
scale-covered creature peeks out from behind a green rock and
takes aim. Star’s weapon is discharged, and an inhuman sound
issues forth from behind the rock.

“Cautiously, she approaches the spot where the sound came
from. Her eyes fix on what appears to be a monster of regal
proportions. He must have stood eight feet tall. He was com-
pletely naked and covered with reptilian scales. She believes
that it must have been a male because of the rather large sex or-
gans that resembled those of a human man. In the distance, she
hears animal-like sounds and see several similar creatures ap-
proaching. She is grateful that they don’t look too bright.
Quickly she returns to Maagnex and begins to usher it into what
appears to be a cave off to her left. As she drags Maagnex into
the cave, she feels a slight upward pull.

“She enters further into the cave and Maagnex soon feels al-
most weightless. Suddenly, she feels herself rising up into the
air in the interior of the cave. Maagnex is following her. She
settles gently onto the ceiling of the cave. She is only twenty
feet into the cave, and she feels almost weightless. The whole
world seems to be up side down. As she pulls Maagnex further into
the cave, her weight seems to increase. There was never anything
like this in her star manual. Gravity becomes reversed in this
bizarre cave.

“Her journey continues as she attempts to find a place where
she can administer aid to Maagnex and notify her Captain. Soon
she finds a small pool of water, resting comfortably in the ceil-
ing of the cave. Maagnex groans, and she harbors some hope that
it will recover sufficiently to return to the ship’s medical
staff. Its wounds are dressed to such an extent to stop the
slight bleeding that occurred, and she reaches for her communica-
tion device. ‘Star to Command,’ she hails the ship.

“There is no answer and her concern increases that the
reverse field that she has encountered has hampered her ability
to reach her ship. She must return to the mouth of the cave in an
effort to contact the ship. She decides to wait in hopes that her
unwanted visitors outside the cave will take their fallen warrior
and leave the area. If the crew of the ship does not hear from
Star soon, they will surely investigate.

“Minutes passed like lazy hours. She decides to approach the
entrance to the cave to try again to communicate with the ship.
Stealthily, she moves across the ceiling of the cave. She begins
to feel more weightless again. Just as she sees the opening, she
feels a presence and smells an odor that she can not identify.
Her weapon is advanced before her. Instantly, her arm is in the
cold grip of something or someone unidentifiable. The pressure on
her wrist is so severe that her weapon floats away. In one swift,
powerful motion she feels her suit stripped from her to expose
her bountiful breasts and vacillating thighs.

“It was one of the creatures that she had encountered upon
arrival. Her heart pounds as she fights this frightening crea-
ture. His cold, scaled hands gently but menacingly reach for her
curving breasts and strokes her taunt buttocks wiggling toward
freedom. Suddenly her panties disappear in one movement exposing
a tuft of soft hair which protects her velvety pussy lips. Her
mind is racing. This creature is trying to rape her. She sees his
engorged, towering member standing in an erect fashion. It has
increased in size and must now be twenty inches in length and a
full four inches wide. His balls are like two soft coconuts,
devoid of hair.

“There is no possible way that she can survive such an as-
sault. Star reaches deep within herself to muster all of her
strength and lashes out with her foot at his huge balls. After
the thud which sounded foreboding, she looks into his eyes to
determine what damage is done. It appeared as though he smiled.
Her concern turns to panic. As they float through the air, she is
helpless to stop his drive. His cold hand reaches into the
crevice of her ass, and he spreads her legs with his strong
finger-like extensions. His other hand is around her waist, and
he draws her to him. Closer and closer his huge cock comes to her
straining pussy. It touches the lips of her pussy, and she fights
him away once again. Her strength is quickly subsiding, and she
knows that only moments stand between her and agony.

“Zap… the report of a ultra-sound weapon steals through
the cave. Star looks into the face of her assailant to find a
stupid, confused look which seemed to linger motionless. The
creature relaxed and seemed to float over into the corner of the
cavern. Star remained floating in the cave, and soon her eyes
fell upon Captain Jim Mandrel standing at the entrance to the
grotto. Star’s relief was beyond words. ‘Are you OK, Star?’ asked
Jim.

“‘Yes Captain. I’ve never been so glad to see anyone in my
life; in the life I almost didn’t have any more. Thank you.’

“‘I’ve never seen a reverse gravity cave before. Is Maagnex
in there with you?’ the Captain inquired as he attempted to
divert his eyes out of deference to Star’s nakedness.

“‘Yes Captain. I don’t know what kind of shape it’s in. It
took a pretty bad shot to the chest,’ she responded as she sud-
denly realized that she didn’t have a stitch of clothing on.

“The Captain explains that their is a security team outside.
He asks them to wait so that Star will not be embarrassed. He
enters the cave and she feels his eyes on her body as she
modestly attempts to cover herself as well as she may with her
hands. The Captain sees her heavy breasts floating in the air.
Her buttocks wiggle nicely as she moves her legs in an effort to
maintain balance. He indicates that he will need some help get-
ting Maagnex to the entrance to the cave. She puts her modesty on
the back burner and follows him to the rear of the cavern. She
feels her weight shift as the gravity once again begins to pull
on her breasts and buttocks. This is one of the strangest feel-
ings she has ever had. It is exciting. It is equally exciting how
the Captain looks at her body and tries to pretend not to see it.

“Star assists Captain Mandrel carry Maagnex to the entrance
to the cavern. He indicates that she should stay well within the
cave until he returns with a new uniform for her. He helped her
locate her weapon and left the cavern with Maagnex into the hands
of the security team waiting to assist,” Jim instructed Star.

As Jim was giving the suggestions to Star as she reclined in
the chair, he noticed that she was becoming excited from time to
time. She seemed to enjoy the weightless feeling that she found
in the cave. He decided to help her capitalize on the feeling.

“You are still in the cavern, warm but naked. You remain in
the weightless area of the cave and are enjoying a feeling that
you have never felt before. Your breasts are large but seem to
float in the air. It is almost similar to swimming in the buff.
You can feel the warm, damp air all around you; kissing your
thighs, teasing your nipples and separating your buttocks. You
enjoy the thought of Captain Mandrel sneaking peeks at your
lovely body. You enjoyed the feeling as you brushed up against
him as you assisted him removing Maagnex from the cave. You begin
to think how it would be to make love in mid-air.

“Almost uncontrollably, your hands reach up and caress your
breasts and tweak you nipples as you wait for the Captain to
return. Suspended in the air you reach behind you to feel the
texture of your buttocks. As you cup one breast with one hand,
the other dips into your own cave to feel its wetness. You are
not sure whether it was the fear of the creature or the excite-
ment that Captain Mandrel offered that made you as wet as you
are. You slip one finger inside of your honey pot; then another
and yet another. You begin to pinch and pull at your nipples.

“When I snap my fingers once, you will open your eyes. You
will be in the cavern in a weightless state. You will notice that
the Captain has returned and has been watching you from the
shadows. You may feel free to deal with this in any way you see
fit. When I snap my fingers again, you will wake up completely
and feel wonderfully rested and completely relaxed. The next time
that I snap my fingers twice and tell you to relax, you will fall
into a deep sleep just as you have this time. Do you understand
all that I have told you, Star?” Jim asked.

“Yes. I understand,” Star said in an almost imperceptible
voice.

Jim snapped his fingers and Star opened her eyes. She jumped
as if she were startled and immediately covered herself with her
hands. She sheepishly looked at Jim and began searching for
words.

“I’m sorry Captain. It was just a strange feeling; something
that I have never felt before. I don’t usually touch myself. I
prefer to leave that to someone else,” Star offered.

Jim returned, “with a body like that, I think I would touch
it as often as I could. I’m kind of sorry now that I never paid
more attention to you. This atmosphere is exciting. It must be
something like skinny-dipping. I brought a new uniform for you. I
hope that I got the size right.”

“I was just thinking the same thing.. about skinny-dipping I
mean. It is uncanny how wonderful it feels. If you don’t think
you’ll be missed for a while, we could always explore this cave a
little more closely. That would give you a chance to see what it
feels like,” Star said.

The Captain returned to the mouth of the cave, said some-
thing on the communicator and returned. He began removing his
uniform with a rather shy smile on his face. “You only live once.
Right?” he said to Star.

She smiled and opened her arms to his naked body. Their lips
met in a warm kiss that seemed to melt with their heat. His hands
reached to touch her large, but weightless breasts. She could
feel her nipples harden to a marble-like quality as they tingled
in his hands. Star felt his cock begin to make the journey from
its resting place to what must be new heights. His tool was not
just floating at this point; it was straining. She could feel it
leave a trail of fluid on her thigh as it increased in both
length and girth. Her hands reached for his buttocks to feel the
hair that uniformly covered his muscular globes. His hand, in
turn, found the cleft between her own ass cheeks, and he
separated these soft, tight mounds.

Her lovely, woolly cunt was dripping with anticipation. The
lips of her pussy began to pout and fold out in anticipation of
his inevitable entrance. Jim placed the tip of his raging organ
into the opening and allowed it to tease. First an inch went into
the depths; then another. He then pulled it out, covered with her
hot cream. He pressed further into her slippery love hole with
four inches and again withdrew. In his next effort, he slip all
eight inches of his fuck tube into her hot cunt until his balls
were well seated against her puckered ass hole. At this depth he
remained, savoring the involuntary convulsions of her hot tunnel.

Lowering his head, he began to suck relentlessly on her ripe
nipples; feeling the spongy texture of her large breasts. It
seemed to Star as if his thick penis began to grow again. “Fuck
my sweet hole Jim. Fuck it hard and deep. Fuck me in the air. Put
your cock deeper into me than you have ever put it in any one,”
she almost screamed.

Jim drove his diamond hard cock into Star with wild abandon.
They floated in the air as Star bucked and road this fiery rod.
Her breasts floated effortlessly, and she could feel the air sur-
rounding them. Suddenly, she could feel a new rigidity enter
Jim’s cock. He grunted deeply and began to shoot hot loads of
cream into Star’s waiting hole. She too, felt a tingling begin in
her toes and move throughout her body. It seemed as if it would
last forever. Again and again a new orgasm visited her.

Soon, they were both spent; drifting in the air. They
relaxed into a cuddling position and continued to touch one
another. Jim broke the silence, “I do hope that you enjoyed it as
much as I did.”

“Wonderful! Absolutely wonderful, Captain,” she responded.

“I don’t doubt that this is one of the most exciting caves
that I have ever explored. I hope that I will have the oppor-
tunity to explore with you once again, Star,” Jim said as he
snapped his fingers.

CHAPTER FIVE – MIND SEX

Would his mind ever quit gravitating to thoughts of gut-
twisting climaxes, beautiful bodies and the dizzying aroma of
sex? Jim sat thinking of the excitement associated with some of
his recent adventures with hypnosis and sex. He had used hypnosis
on his lovely wife Peggy on several occasions in scenarios rang-
ing from a massage by a hunk of a man to actually fucking he and
a friend at the same time. Their sex had never been so good. He
wasn’t sure whether Peggy would ever have broken fear’s icy grip
had he not used hypnosis, but he was glad that she did. Now she
was free to experiment with her own sexuality without concern for
traditional guilt or jealousy.

Jim did have to deal with his own guilt however. He
developed the usual arguments about allowing his wife to be
promiscuous. They included reputation, children, jealousy and
relationship. He felt quite confident that, as long as they were
discrete, neither his nor Peggy’s reputation would suffer. Their
children were all but grown now. Both daughters were away at col-
lege. On the topic of jealousy, they had seen too many of their
friends break up or divorce because they were jealous of another
person. He was confident that no man or woman could challenge
their emotional commitments. If that were possible, they
shouldn’t be together in the first place.

Before Jim ever committed to involve himself in the life-
style of sexual freedom, he searched his heart. If Peggy never
had a sexy thought about another man, she probably wouldn’t be
normal. Should he allow himself to be jealous of that? Did he
want Peggy to become enraged if he wanted another woman? Vir-
tually every man he knew strayed from time to time. When it was
done with deception it was always negative and sometimes resulted
in broken relationships. Had they not been broad-minded enough,
he was sure that they would have lost one another long ago. It
would have been a terrible waste, because in all other matters
they were the best of friends and excellent partners in life.
Guilt and jealousy, as a result, were not valid issues. Their
life had been vastly enhanced with no danger of deception ruining
their relationship.

Jim’s mind began to work on sharing these principals with
others with two motives in mind. The first motive was, quite
naturally, to locate other individuals that turned him on. The
next was to promote the use of hypnosis in sex and the lifestyle
of sexual freedom. The day didn’t go by that he didn’t sign on to
the computer bulletin board service. They had a great x-rated
section that permitted him to chat with others about sex
anonymously. Obviously, most of the people that he chatted with
were women. They would share their sexual fantasies with him and
he with them.

Jim had also left public messages on the system suggesting
that if anyone cared to discuss a swinging lifestyle or hypnosis
in the bed room that they should feel free to contact him. One
day after logging on to the system, he heard his computer beep.
This was accompanied by a message indicating that Don wanted to
chat with him. Jim responded to the page and welcomed the caller.
Don, a computer communicator from Western Illinois, inquired
whether or not Jim was serious about the use of hypnosis in the
bed room. Jim indicated that he was and explained some of the
uses of hypnosis to improve sexual relationships.

Excitement was evident in Don’s responses. Jim asked whether
Don and his lady had ever experimented with other persons outside
of their relationship. Don indicated that he had not, but would
not be opposed if Donna would consent. He went on to say that she
would likely not be interested, but that he would discuss the
topic with her. Jim suggested that Don allow Donna to read one of
the stories that he wrote on the topic. If she demonstrated any
interest, they could pursue the matter further. Don thanked Jim
for his information, indicated that the conversation had really
turned him on and assured Jim that he would get back to him.

A few days went by and Jim heard nothing further from Don.
Then one day as Jim was jumping around the bulletin board system
he was again paged. He responded to the page and found Don wait-
ing to continue the previous conversation. Don indicated that he
had offered Jim’s article to Donna and that she had found it very
interesting. Additionally he and Donna had discussed the topic of
“hypnosex” at length, became very aroused at the many doors that
this would open for them and fucked each other’s brains out af-
terward. Jim got a smile on his face as his mind turned to mo-
ments gone by. He had similar experiences and could identify with
the other couple.

Don asked Jim if he would ever be willing to travel to Il-
linois to put on a demonstration of hypnosis. As he heard this
request, he could feel the warmth begin to develop in his pants.
Jim’s cock began to grow thinking about the prospect of teaching
yet others to reach the heights that he and Peggy did. He indi-
cated that it was possible that he could take a long weekend and
visit with them. Jim also told Don that there would be no obliga-
tion to continue to pursue such avenues if after they met him
they did not feel comfortable. Don told Jim that he would leave
some electronic mail for him explaining how to reach Don’s house
and other incidentals. They bid each other good bye and signed
off the system.

Jim was an accomplished hypnotist. He had been using hyp-
nosis clinically for years helping police departments interview
witnesses for recall of events. He had never had the occasion to
use hypnosis on anyone other than Peggy for purposes of improved
sex. This was indeed exciting. He would be able to teach Donna
how to improve and intensify her climaxes. He would be able to
teach her mind how to fly to a secluded beach with her lover,
shape her lover into any person she wanted and have the best sex
she had ever known. Don would also benefit by the same abilities.
He could stay harder longer, turn Donna into anyone he wanted to,
be more responsive to his partner’s needs and generally enjoy all
of his adventures much better. His cock was hard just thinking of
all of the possibilities.

The date was set. Jim had arranged for an extended weekend.
He would go to Chicago to attend a trade show for his business
and then scurry over to Western Illinois. As he drove, his
thoughts turned to his own sexuality and many of the experiences
he had over the years. He was getting a little older, but was
pleased that he had stayed in shape. As he hit the Indiana line a
smile appeared on his face. He was remembering several of his
friends and his children teasing him about how much he resembled
Indiana Jones. It wasn’t only his appearance; he even acted like
him from time to time. The road continued to disappear under the
hood of his car as his mind turned to many of the hot times he
had experienced.

His Chicago trip was basically routine. He pulled out of the
Holiday Inn Merchandise Mart and began moving westward. He
snapped in a cassette that responded with soft tunes designed to
invite thought. Invite it they did. Jim’s mind again returned to
visions of previous hot moments; Peggy’s unbridled excitement the
first time she thought she was being touched by another man. Of
course this was Jim, but Peggy’s mind and body reacted as if it
were another man. New hands on her heavy breasts, a strange penis
poised at the lips of her quivering pussy, a sharp, warm tongue
pressed against her tight buttocks were the moments that traveled
through Jim’s mind. He was becoming so rigid that he thought his
zipper would burst. Then there was the time that Peggy had ac-
tually touched another man for the first time. Jim could see this
as sure as if it were happening here, in the car, before his very
eyes. The miles clicked by on the odometer as visions of hot,
sweet encounters danced through his memory.

The message and directions that Jim had received from Don
suggested that they meet at the lounge of a local hotel at eight
in the evening. Jim didn’t have a problem with that. These people
didn’t know him and would obviously be skeptical. What if Jim
were a gargoyle type with warts on his nose and rolls of fat
hanging from a copious frame? It was only prudent for them to
want to meet Jim in a neutral location so they could excuse them-
selves if they were uncomfortable with him. Jim checked into the
hotel, got settled, cleaned up and headed for the restaurant to
get a bite to eat.

Dining alone was an interesting experience. You don’t
usually get bogged down in a conversation that distracts you, so
you can often analyze people a little better. You eat at your
leisure, scan the room for interesting people, and enjoy an un-
common solace. Jim was convinced that his libido was in rare form
as his eyes locked on to a waitress with an usually great-looking
ass. As she moved across the room her buttocks rolled with such
grace that Jim could feel himself stiffen. Her uniform was cut in
such a way that her small but well-shaped breasts danced nicely.
He memorized her curves and her pretty face so that he might use
self hypnosis at a later date to make love with her.

Dinner being history, Jim lit a cigarette and sipped on his
after-dinner drink. He continued to evaluate the inhabitants of
the room. Now wouldn’t it be great if that couple sitting at the
table next to the aquarium were Don and Donna. The lady had
beautiful brown hair, sparkling brown eyes, about 5′5″ tall, with
a very lovely shape. She appeared to be blessed with full breasts
that seemed to be about a 34 C. She had the loveliest smile and
winning manner. They were enjoying their dinner and one another.
Jim was incredulous when he thought about all of the couples that
seemed to be in competition with one another as opposed to being
partners and friends. This couple seemed to be the type that
would not let jealousy get in the way of their friendship. Jim
could see their genuine laughter tickle through the room from
time to time. They looked at one another with respect, and Jim
liked that.

Jim paid the check and got up from the table. As he began
walking away from the table his foot caught one leg of the chair
next to him and over it went. Nothing like being embarrassed to
tears as the room came to a silent halt. Putting on his red face,
he smiled at the couple next to the aquarium and exited the room.
The lounge, called “The Hound,” was an interesting place. It
resembled a victorian scene. There were old British gas lights
throughout the room providing the only lighting. The floor was
made to resemble cobblestones, and there was piped in hansom cab
and other street sounds. He expected Sherlock Holmes and Dr. Wat-
son to come through the door at any minute. He walked over to a
rough hewn table and pulled out one of the heavy wooden chairs to
sit down.

This decor was wonderful. The walls were graced with two
mounted deer heads and one huge moose head. In another corner was
a suit of armor complete with shield and sword. Old pottery and
pewter tableware accented the room. While glancing around the
room, he was startled by someone standing next to him. He gave a
slight jump in response to Bridgit’s request to assist him. What
a great looking waitress. She was dressed in the costume of an
english barmaid. He bodice was very low cut and her cleavage
seemed to speak to him. He had difficulty removing his eyes from
her breasts to answer her. When he finally did look up he saw
that Bridgit was also possessed of an absolutely beautiful face
with slightly overlapping front teeth. She smiled and again re-
quested his order handing him what appeared to be a british five
pound note. She also told him that the specials were on the
reverse of what appeared to be english currency. He ordered a
tall rum and coke.

As Bridgit walked away, Jim’s eyes were glued to her lovely
buttocks as they swayed playfully toward the bar. He watcher her
as she placed the drink on a tray and returned to his table. As
she bent over to set a napkin in front of him Jim’s eyes were
again treated to a cock-wrenching view of her ample breasts. Once
again she bent over and placed his drink in front of him. Jim
said, “Good god almighty, if you continue to serve drinks to me
like that, I’ll be ordering one every minute.”

Bridgit grinned at him and told him that it was early and
that it would be best if he paced himself. “Only if you promise
that one day before I die you will fall passionately in love with
me and let me drink a small cup of your bath water,” Jim teased.

The lovely waitress again chuckled and bounced away from the
table. Jim was enamored by Bridgit to say the least. She made him
want to ask the one about, what’s a nice girl like you etc. Jim
was thinking that it was rather slow in the lounge as he heard
the sound of what appeared to be Big Ben sounding seven o’clock.
Just another hour to kill, thought Jim. He wanted to gulp his
drink just so Bridgit would return with another. Ten minutes went
by, and he could feel the lovely waitress sneaking peeks at him
from time to time. He wasn’t peeking; he was staring, and Bridgit
didn’t seem to mind.

She returned to his table and asked if there was anything
that she could do for him. She quickly caught what she had said
and stumbled with the words, “well you know what I mean.”

“Unfortunately, young lady, I do. However, I would like
another drink if you wouldn’t mind,” Jim responded. She again
smiled and danced off to acquire another rum and coke. She
returned more quickly this time as the bartender wasn’t very
busy. Once again her lovely globes bounced in front of Jim’s
eyes. This time he was not quite so obvious in his appreciation.
He thought it would be better to be cool and collected and not
seem too anxious.

Bridgit stood and talked with him for a while about the ob-
vious interests before she was called away to another table. Jim
had learned that she was twenty-nine years of age. She had a four
year old daughter. She had returned to school in an effort to get
her degree in computer science, and she had only been working
here for about three days. Bridgit had recently broken up with
her boyfriend, but she really didn’t care to discuss that in any
detail. Jim felt comfortable that she had some interest in him.
He indicated that he was married and filled her in on the other
usual details.

Jim’s lovely waitress returned several times and offered him
a smile every time their glance met. At about 7:50 the couple
that was sitting next to the aquarium in the restaurant walked
into the lounge. They glanced at Jim, and his discomfort returned
about almost falling on his ass in front of them. They selected a
table three tables over from Jim and were seated. Bridgit was
soon there to take their orders. Again they demonstrated their
mutual excitement and interest. Things began to perk up a little.
Two other couples entered and were seated. Several single men and
women came in and gravitated to the bar. When the music began to
play the atmosphere was somewhat changed. No longer did Jim feel
as though he were trapped in a time warp. He was a little sad-
dened at the loss of the victorian era.

Now the hard part came. There were several couples in the
lounge and many singles. How in the hell would Jim be able to
determine who Don and Donna were? His eyes traveled the room,
hoping that someone would offer some signal. One of the new
couples who had entered seemed to be making more than usual eye
contact with Jim. He got up from his chair and went over to their
table. He approached the man and asked if his name was Don. “No,
I’m sorry, you got the wrong guy,” responded the man. Christ, did
he ever feel like an ass hole. Why couldn’t he have agreed on a
signal that they could use? He excused himself and returned to
his table. No sooner did he get re-seated, the man from res-
taurant aquarium approached him. “You look as if you could be
Jim,” he said.

“You have to think me a real klutz,” Jim smiled as he rose
to shake Don’s hand.

“Oh, you mean the chair in the dining room. No, don’t worry
about it. I slipped on my ass getting out of the car to come in
here. There wasn’t anyone around so I didn’t feel so bad. Why
don’t you come over and join us,” said Don.

Jim gathered up his glass and followed Don over to his
table. He was very pleasantly surprised that this was the couple
that he would get to know. Donna was even lovelier up close. She
had such a pleasant voice and demure handshake. Jim enjoyed the
way she continued to hold his hand while they were being intro-
duced.

“Can you really accomplish all of the wonderful things that
I read about through hypnosis Jim?” inquired Donna.

“I hesitate saying ‘yes’ without reservation. You can do
many things and do them quickly if you are a good subject. If you
are not what is referred to as a somnambulist, it may take prac-
tice and the necessary time would be increase,” offered Jim.

Don asked, “how do you determine whether or not someone is a
good subject?”

Jim explained, “it is often a matter of trial and error.
Some methods work better with one person than another. One thing
is for sure, each of us can experience hypnosis to one degree or
another. Your sexual experiences can always be improved. If you
feel comfortable, after we finish our drinks, we can go to the
room or to your place and experiment. If you become uncomfort-
able, we can stop and return for a leisurely chat.”

Don and Donna looked at one another, smiled and agreed to
give it a shot. They indicated that they would feel more comfort-
able if they were to go to Jim’s room. He assured them that it
was fine with him, that he would pay his tab and see them in room
338 as soon as they were ready.

Jim walked up to Bridgit, tapped her on the shoulder and
asked for his bill. She seemed a little disappointed that he was
leaving. He told her that he had a meeting and may be able to
return later. She didn’t respond; she merely smiled. Jim turned
to walk away when he heard her say, “I hope you can make it back.
We’re open till 2:30.” Jim smiled and exited the lounge.

As he walked toward the room, he felt a shiver of excitement
run through him. He hoped that both of the subjects would be deep
trance subjects. He would interview them about what they hope to
accomplish when they got to the room.

It didn’t take long for Jim to hear a knock at the door. He
quickly opened the door and was faced with a couple that had a
look on their face as if they were at the door of a house party.
Jim immediately asked them for their coats and secured them.
“Come in and make yourselves comfortable. I’m sorry I can’t offer
you anything to drink right now. After we talk for a little while
we can have a cocktail or some wine.

The interview proved interesting and gave him a good idea of
what the couple hoped to accomplish. Donna indicated that she was
very nervous, but added that she was raised to believe that it
was sinful to wander from one’s intended or chosen partner. Don
was surprised to hear her say that she had had thoughts about
other men just as any other woman would. She indicated that she
would likely not want fear or jealousy to threaten her relation-
ship.

Jim was able to determine that her orgasms were generally
standard, and she was in good physical and psychological health.
She thought that it would be great to be able to fantasize about
making love in another, more adventurous time. She wanted to be a
girl on the Spanish Gold Coast who had been kidnaped by pirates
aboard a frigate and rescued by a dashing swashbuckler who looked
very much like Richard Gear. She thought that he was one of the
most sexy men she had ever seen.

Don was then interviewed, and Jim was satisfied that he too
was sound and had normal fantasies. All of this excited Jim. He
was happy that he had established a rapport with this lovely
couple. Jim then said, “let’s now get down to business. Donna, I
am first going to show you how to relax so you can enjoy the
experience.” He moved a chair away from the table and placed it
facing a blind corner of the room. Donna was instructed to sit in
the chair and focus on a point on the wall. Jim began speaking to
Donna and showed her how to relax more completely. Soon it was
apparent to Jim that Donna would be a good subject. He put her
into a light trance and continued to speak to her. Deeper and
deeper she went. Soon she was very deeply asleep.

Jim instructed her to remain in a deep trance and not to
awaken until she was told to wake up. Don was simply amazed as he
asked, “do you mean to tell me that she is completed hypnotized?”
Jim assured him that she was. He went on to explain that he would
do a few experiments to better illustrate what was happening. Jim
turned to Donna and gave her a post-hypnotic suggestion that when
she heard the words “the rain in Spain falls mainly in the
plane,” she would find herself on a desert island all alone. She
would be on the beach. She could hear the gulls and the waves
rolling against the shore. She would have the desire to take her
clothing off and bask in the warm rays of the sun. She would be
completely alone and could then do anything that she wanted.

The suggestions was also give that from now on, when Jim
snapped his fingers twice, she would fall into a very deep hyp-
notic trance. He also gave her the ability to create any dream
that she wanted to. All she had to do was to envision the person
she wanted to be with, where she wanted to be and what she wanted
to be doing; she would then say the word “Alpha” to herself,
close her eyes, and she would fall into a deep sleep for ten
minutes and have the dream she fashioned.

At this point Donna was woken up slowly and told that she
would remember nothing of the experience. She was also told that
she would feel very refreshed and rested, as well as very sexy.
“Now wake up feeling wonderful,” Jim urged.

Donna told Jim and Don that she felt good but really didn’t
think that it had worked. Jim had a self assured smile on his
face and indicated to the couple that this was often the case but
she really was very deeply asleep. She disagreed with Jim, but
did indicate that she was grateful for being taught how to so
deeply relax. She hadn’t felt this good in a long time. Jim asked
her if she would like a demonstration of post-hypnotic suggest-
ion. She indicated that it would interest her. “The rain in Spain
falls mainly in the plane,” were Jim’s next words.

Donna got up from the chair as her eyes seemed to be focused
on something far away. She kicked off her shoes as her fingers
started to unbutton her blouse. Don couldn’t believe his eyes.
Donna was normally very modest about such things. Her thumbs
hooked themselves inside of her slacks and down they came. She
curled her arms up behind her back and unfasten her bra. There
was a look of embarrassment and excitement on both men’s faces.
Don opened his mouth to speak not knowing whether he should do
so. Jim looked at Don and said, “feel free to talk if you want
to. She can’t hear or see you.”

As her bra fell to the ground, she slipped her panties off
and discarded them also. There she was in all of her lovely nude
splendor. Her bold breasts spreading across her chest as she
stretched feeling the warmth of the sun lick her body. Her but-
tocks were flexed tight as she stood on her tip toes trying to
get closer to the sun. She let out an appreciative moan as she
lowered herself to the bed. Jim and Don watched as she lay there
soaking up the sun. She soon turned over to offer her backside to
the warmth. Jim’s cock was hard now. Not only was he very excited
sexually with this vision, he was excited that he was able to
share this wonder with Donna and Don.

Jim explained much of what was happening to Don. Soon Donna
rolled over and began to squirm. Her hands went to her breasts
and the thumb and forefinger of each hand were rolling her
nipples gently. She squeezed her thighs together and began moan-
ing. Don was very excited as he told Jim that he had never seen
Donna touch herself. He was amazed at how erotic it was. Donna’s
left hand suddenly dropped to her soft public hair and her legs
opened slightly. She was searching in the folds of her pussy. Her
fingers were now wet with excitement.

She gently ran her slippery fingers over the lips of her
swollen pussy. Don was convinced that this was likely the hottest
he had ever been. He wanted to rip his clothes off and fuck her
like he had never fucked her before. Jim calmed him down and ad-
vised him that there would be time for that later. The experiment
should continue. Don agreed, but could not take his hand off of
his rock-hard cock.

Jim walked over to the bed and snapped his fingers twice. As
soon as he did, Donna returned to her deep sleep. Jim instructed
her that he would wake her soon. When she woke up, she would
remember everything that occurred. She would remember it without
embarrassment and feel very pleased with herself. Additionally
when she heard the word “Beta” she would feel a mini climax and a
tingling in her nipples. She was instructed to place herself un-
der the sheets and wake up slowly.

Soon Donna was awake. She simply starred at both men. “I
can’t believe it. It was one of the nicest dreams I ever had. It
was so sexy. I didn’t know I could get that turned on. Holly
christ! My clothes are off. What happened to my clothes?” Donna
asked.

Don responded to her first, “you took them off when you were
on the beach honey. It wasn’t just a dream. It really happened.
We saw everything. Do you feel OK?”

“Yes I feel great, but I can hardly believe that I took my
clothes off in front of Jim. I don’t even ….” Donna began.

“…Know me?” asked Jim. “No you don’t, but apparently you
felt comfortable enough with me to do just that. You can now do
other wonderful things. Do you remember the post-hypnotic sug-
gestion that I gave you about creating your own dreams?”

She indicated that she did, and Jim urged her to try it now.
Donna thought for a minute and said the word “Alpha” out loud.
She soon fell into a deep sleep. Don and Jim watched what ap-
peared to be a fitful sleep, but the looks on Donna’s face were
those of ecstasy and lust. They watched slight movements of her
body as if she were having a wonderful sexy dream. In exactly ten
minutes she woke up and sat bolt upright in the bed. She clutched
the bed sheet to her breasts, but walked on her knees over to the
two men. Both men had large smiles on their faces. She reached up
and kissed Don. “It was absolutely wonderful honey,” were her
words.

She offered her lips to Jim who hungrily accepted them. She
have him a big kiss and said, “I don’t know how to thank you Jim.
These feelings are probably the best I’ve ever had. I am still so
hot I don’t know what to do with myself.” Jim’s cock hardened
even more as Donna pressed her sheet-covered breasts against him.
As she hugged him, he was offered the greatest view of her but-
tocks over her shoulder.

Jim, trying to keep his wits about him said, “and the nice
thing about it is that you can do this anytime you want. I want
to show you something else Donna. ‘Beta!’” Donna sank back onto
the bed and let the sheet fall from her body. Her eyes rolled
slightly as the small climax began to diminish. “Anytime you want
to get to small nut, just say the word ‘Beta,’” Jim assured her.
“Now I’m going to ask you both to come back tomorrow night if you
would like. I want to work with Don and teach you both how to do
some other amazing things.” Donna got dressed, and she and Don
thanked Jim as they left the room.

The clock at the side of the bed read 11:37. Jim didn’t
really feel tired, and he wanted to see Bridgit again, so he
freshened up and headed for the lounge. The lovely waitress
seemed awfully happy to see him return. She came quickly over to
his table and asked him if he needed anything. This time he told
her, “you’ll never know, but I’ll settle for another drink.”

Bridgit said, “I’ll get you the drink, but I would like to
know.” She pranced away with what appeared to be an extra effort
at swinging her fanny. It didn’t go unnoticed by Jim. He was so
aroused after having seen the experience that Donna just had that
he badly wanted to make love with Bridgit. He could think of
little else.

Soon she returned with his drink. This time when she placed
it in front of him she intentionally lingered to expose her large
breasts to his gaze. He took full advantage of it and said,
“please tell me that you have fallen passionately in love with me
and can’t live without me.”

“I don’t know that that is the case, but I would like to
spend some time getting to know you better. It’s a little slow
right now. Would you like me to see if I can get off a little
early,” she asked.

“I would love that,” Jim hastened. He was wondering whether
or should just be straight forward and ask her to his room, or if
he should offer to take her someplace for a drink or coffee.

He didn’t have to wonder long. She returned to say that she
could leave in fifteen minutes. “Would you like to just go up to
your room and we could have something sent up?” she inquired.

“That would be great. What if I go up and get the drinks or-
dered so we won’t have a wait? What do you like to drink?” Jim
asked.

“Scotch and water is fine. No, make is white wine. See you
soon. I got the room number from the restaurant. OK, so I was a
little curious,” she said with a smile.

Jim hurried to the room and placed the order for room serv-
ice. He also ordered a sea food snack tray. The time wouldn’t
pass quickly enough. In a short time there was a knock at the
door. He jumped to answer it. It was room service. He admitted
the server, signed the check and quickly offered the tip. No
sooner did he get the tray over to the table, he heard another
knock at the door. His blood began to run more quickly. It was
Bridgit. She was dressed in a lovely pastel sweater that provided
sufficient accent to her lovely breasts and dark slacks that
gratefully hugged her rounded buttocks. “Please make yourself
comfortable,” Jim offered.

She sat at the table and told Jim that he shouldn’t have
gone to all this trouble. He assured her it was no trouble and
joined her. They enjoyed some interesting small talk as they com-
pleted the snacks. Bridgit asked Jim if he would mind if she
freshened up a bit. Jim told her that his place was her place.
She gave him a little kiss and moved toward the bath room. Jim
was anxious to hold her in his arms. Soon he heard the water run-
ning in the bath tub. He hadn’t thought that she was this serious
about freshening up. Apparently she was. Well, he could wait. He
poured himself another glass of wine and settled down for the
wait. Soon Bridgit called his name. He approached the door and
asked if she needed anything. She asked him if he would object to
washing her back. The smile spread across his face as he entered
the bath room.

She twisted to hang up the last remnant of her clothing and
Jim was treated to a view of her exciting buttocks. Naked, they
were even more exciting with the deep groove separating them.

She turned to him and came toward him, and he watched
shocked and fascinated as the twin breasts swayed from side to
side, making the nipples dance. With a cute smile she stepped
into the tub, bringing her hot sweet flesh within inches of his
throbbing cock.

He couldn’t take his eyes off of her as she slid into the
water and urged him to join her. His clothes fell like rain.
Somehow they managed to twist their limbs so that they both fit
well into the tub, her legs resting neatly on his and curled
around his hips. She handed him the soap and asked him to wash
her. His initial attempt was on her back, but soon the temptation
proved too much for him and he concentrated on her bountiful
breasts, covering them in lather.

She giggled as his hands massaged the firm flesh and tweaked
the hard nipples. He had an overwhelming urge to suck her begging
nipples, but decided that the lather would likely not be to his
liking. He confined himself to running his hands over her
breasts, tweaking her nipples with his thumbs, making her shudder
with excitement. Her red lips were parted and she was breathing
heavily while her sensuous eyes were hooded, making her look like
a feline predator waiting to spring on its prey.

Jim knelt up and washed her flat stomach, taking his time,
tantalizing himself until he could hold back no longer. He
reached down into the forest that obscured the new object of his
desire. He soaped the thick fur and then, using the soap he
pushed the hair aside to reveal her rosy slit. He parted the
puffy lips gently and eased a finger inside her volcanic hole.

Bridgit moaned out loud and laced an arm around his neck and
brought his face towards hers in a deep hungry kiss. Her tongue
forced itself between his lips and into his mouth. It was fran-
tic, agile and quick as it searched for Jim’s tongue. He was
still sliding his finger in and out of her hot cunt while his
thumb rubbed her growing clit. His other hand was still squeezing
her breasts and nipples. Their embrace became more and more pas-
sionate and his cock was jerking around like a taunt fire hose.

Finally they broke apart, both of them flushed with erotic
desire. Bridgit stood up and stepped out of the tub grabbing a
towel and began to dry herself off. She pulled Jim to his feet
and wiped him dry. He couldn’t remember the last time someone
dried him. I reminded him of his childhood, but there was nothing
child-like about the raging erection which she also paid atten-
tion to.

She dropped the towel to the floor as their warm, moist
bodies met in a new embrace, and they kissed deeply once again.
His stiff bone was pressed up against her hard belly as Jim
noticed the bed which seemed to beckon to him. When they got to
the bed, she again took the initiative. She pushed him back on
the bed. He felt awkward as his legs dangled off the end of the
bed. Her hands had found Jim’s erect pole and were gently strok-
ing it up and down. Bridgit held the hard cock upright as her
lips lowered to meet it. He felt her lips close around it.

His cock was getting wetter and wetter as she left a trail
of warm saliva with each plunge, and his organ was jerking power-
fully in the sheath of her lips. He could hear the erotic slurp-
ing noises as she eagerly and expertly swallowed his pulsating
ramrod to the back of her throat. Jim’s hips were responding to
her rhythm by lifting to meet her attack, penetrating her more
deeply. Deeper and harder she sucked. Jim knew that he would not
be able to withstand much more without loosing control. Jim
stopped her with a groan of passion. “Wait, wait Bridgit. I don’t
want it to end yet,” Jim pleaded.

Jim began kissing her body. He sucked on her nipples as her
moans came in harmony with his efforts. He reluctantly let a
nipples escape as his lips traveled down her body, kissing and
licking every inch of her flesh as he slowly slid down to his
target area. He could feel her hands trying to hurry his journey,
but he resisted and took his time, savoring the texture and taste
of her flesh. Soon he reached the forest of public hair from
which rose an intoxicating aroma of pussy juices. Her legs parted
and he could see the pink, puffy lips nestled in the patch of
hair, glistening with arousal.

His tongue plunged into the hot lava of her love volcano. He
knew that she would not release her grip on him until he sucked,
licked and lapped her hot cunt to explosion. With his hands
firmly holding her wiggling buttocks, he furiously drove his hard
tongue into her body massaging the walls of her cunt, darting
from side to side and gathering up the love juices. Soon
Bridgit’s cunt exploded and poured its cream inside Jim’s waiting
mouth. He drank her womanly nectar as if he would never have the
chance to do this again. She screamed as her climax broke and
seemed to swallow her up.

Jim didn’t want her to loose all of the excitement of her
climax as he swiftly mounted her, and using his fist aimed the
head of his eight inch rod into her very slippery pussy, parting
the puffy lips and scouring through the hot liquids until his
cock was fully embedded in her. He eased his hands under her
ample ass cheeks and grasped the resilient flesh, pulling her up-
ward as he shoved his cock yet deeper into her tunnel. Her body
immediately responded and the embers of her previous climax
flared into life. She started to meet every thrust with an upward
heave of her hips.

It was Bridgit’s body that first broke the stride. Suddenly,
her hips froze the rhythm and then started to jerk up and down
very fast, thrusting her cunt more fiercely over Jim’s huge or-
gan. Her greasy pussy was endeavoring to swallow his cock whole
and keep it in the greedy clutch of her vaginal muscles. She
screamed in jolts. The fierce clutch of her wet cunt on his cock
was too much for him to take. His back stiffened and arched while
his cock attempted to find new depths. Very soon his cock pole
began to erupt furiously into Bridgit’s tight, hairy cunt hole.
They slipped into sleep almost immediately afterward.

The next morning when Jim awoke, Bridgit was gone. He found
a note on hotel stationary wherein she excused herself and told
him that she hoped to see him again soon. Jim read the note as he
tried to blink away his sleep. He rolled around the bed remember-
ing the wonderful evening. After a time of lovely thought, he got
up and took a shower. He dressed and went down to the dining room
to have some breakfast. When he returned, the red message light
was flashing on his phone. He called down to the desk to find
that there was a message for him to call Don.

After speaking with Don, it was decided that they would
again meet this afternoon at about two o’clock. Jim had brought
his lap top computer with him and was able to get a little writ-
ing in. He also wiled away part some of the day shopping and
reading. He was anxious to meet with Don and Donna to see what
other successes they could achieve.

Two o’clock soon arrived and shortly thereafter there came a
knock at the door. Jim went to the door and opened it with a
smile. Donna’s brown eyes were staring into his own, and Don was
standing just behind her.

“Please do come in,” Jim said as he stepped aside. “Did you
have a good evening last night?”

Don hastened to respond, “I don’t think we ever had such an
exciting day in our lives. When we got home we continued to talk
about the experience and conducted several experiments ourselves.
Donna was able to have several dreams. I merely watched, and it
was a very hot time. I was also able to use the post-hypnotic
suggestion “Beta” to give her multiple minor orgasms. It served
as a remarkable addition to our regular foreplay,” said Don.
Donna seemed a little embarrassed by the descriptive narrative.

Jim explained that it was now Don’s turn to experience the
trance state. Don was asked to take a seat, and they got im-
mediately under way. Jim helped Don relax through a method that
requires the subject to flex and relax various parts of his body.
Soon Don was completely relaxed, and Jim began speaking softly
and clearly. After a short while Don was in the trance state. Jim
continued to work with him and deepen the trance.

In the minutes that passed, Jim taught Don how to use auto-
hypnosis to hallucinate visually. He was able to change the
sight, sound, taste and feel of his partner. His post-hypnotic
suggestion was precipitated by the words “hypnosex partner.” When
he said or heard the words “come back” all of his senses would
return to normal. He was also given the suggestion that whenever
he heard the words “rock-hard cock,” he would get an immediate
erection. He was also told that when he said or hear the words,
“relax it,” his erection would subside. Jim woke him up slowly,
assuring him that he would feel wonderful and well rested.

As Don opened his eyes his head dropped to his hands. When
asked how he felt, he answered that he felt great and wanted to
know how he did. He was told that he did very well and was now
capable of doing some remarkable things. “Go ahead and try it
out,” said Donna.

Don repeated, “hypnosex partner,” and stared at Donna in
shear surprise. He got up and walked over to her, putting his
hands around her waist. His lips sought hers as his right hand
dropped to the cleft of her buttocks. They were beginning to get
carried away when Jim spoke the words, “come back.”

Don was shocked at who he found in his arms. “I almost feel
guilty Donna. You were someone else. I was kissing someone else
and feeling her ass,” Don said in wonder.

“Was it exciting?” Donna asked. Don assured her that it was
and told Jim that it was unbelievable.

“Rock-hard cock,” were the next words out of Jim’s mouth.
Immediately the front of Don’s pants developed a huge bulge. Don
was again amazed. He couldn’t believe that his penis could be
this hard on demand. He wanted to know how this was possible.

Jim went on to draw an analogy for them. He inquired as to
whether or not Don ever woke up in the morning, not necessarily
horny, with a huge stiff. Don told him that he had. Jim continued
to explain that an erection was merely blood rushing into the
penis. There is a part in the brain that directs blood to the
penis upon arousal. The mind controls so many of our functions.
It is a simple matter to control this when all conditions are
right. He also explained that often men question themselves about
impotence because even when they want to get an erection, they
sometimes can’t. They begin to question themselves. If you ever
get an erection upon waking up in the morning, your mind was
likely relaxed and thinking about sex. We all have mental images
that can make us aroused. Sometimes we don’t know exactly what
they are. Don’s cock remained hard as Jim explained. The words
“relax it,” were then spoken, and Don’s erection began to go
down.

“Now, let’s work with Donna some more. OK with you Donna?”
Jim asked. She responded in the affirmative and was asked to take
a seat. She sat in the chair and was questioned about whether
there was anything specific she wanted to learn how to do. She
indicated to Jim that she was very impressed with what Don had
been able to do, and she would like to be able to bring on hal-
lucinations as well. Jim snapped his finger twice, and Donna’s
chin fell slowly to her chest in complete relaxation.

He took her deeper and deeper into a wonderful sleep as he
felt Don tap him on the shoulder. “Can she hear us?” Don asked.
Jim indicated that she could hear unless directed not to. Don
continued, “ask her not to hear our conversation so I can tell
you something.” Jim did this and urged Don to continue. Don said,
“you know Jim, Donna and I spoke about quite a few things last
night when we got home. At my urging, she told me that she would
like to make it with another man but was afraid. She specifically
said that she thought you were very sexy. Is there anything we
could do to remove her anxiety about trying another man? I know I
am ready to ignore jealousy. I trust her, but I want her to have
it all. Do you find her desirable?”

Jim assured him that, “she was indeed a very sexy woman. I
think we can trade places in her mind, if you think she would
like it.”

Don agreed. Jim spoke to Donna again, “you are now more
deeply asleep than you have ever been before. When you awaken,
Don will become Jim and Jim will be Don in every way. Jim will
look like Don, sound like him, feel like him and taste like him.
You will find yourself uncontrollably attracted to him and will
need to feel him inside you. You will feel free to do anything
with him that pleases you without regard for who else is in the
room. In fact, because someone is watching you, you will become
even more excited. When you hear me clap my hands twice, Jim and
Don will again trade places and be themselves. you will remember
nothing until I clap my hands twice.” Jim also gave her the sug-
gestion that she will be able to change Don any time she wished,
just as Don had learned. Jim told her that she would wake up very
slowly, feeling wonderful and refreshed.

Donna began to open her eyes slowly. “I really can’t remem-
ber anything. Did it go well?” she asked and looked at Don. Don
told her that everything went very well. She got up from the
chair and moved toward Jim. “Honey, I don’t really know why, but
I have this uncontrollable urge to screw you eyes out. And oddly
enough, I don’t even care if Jim watches. What did you do to me
Jim?” she asked of Don with an unusual sparkle in her brown eyes.
Jim opened his arms as Donna fell into them with her mouth par-
tially open.

Don sunk into a chair next to the table with a curious look
on his face. Jim looked over at him and Don nodded his head,
giving authority to proceed. Jim could see Don’s hand fall upon
his already hard cock as his hands began to explore Donna’s full
breasts. Donna stepped back and removed her top in one quick mo-
tion. She tore at the buttons to Jim’s shirt. Soon they were all
but naked. Only her panties remained as she returned to Jim’s
embrace, rubbing her pubic mound against his leg. Don settled
back and unzipped his trousers. His thick cock was withdrawn, and
he stroked its length as his eyes watched every move of Donna and
her lover. Jim reached his hand inside of Donna’s pink panties
onto the swell of her buttocks. Squeezing the wonderfully tex-
tured flesh of her fanny gave Jim all the more reason to become
harder. Donna dipped in to his shorts, and her hand felt his cock
length increase.

The aroma of this lovely woman rose to meet Jim’s nostrils.
She felt the cream beginning to seep from the eye of his steel-
like hammer. Panties and shorts were removed in speedy unison as
they fell to the bed. Don was now stroking his huge cock more
quickly. His balls were being tortured by his zipper. He stood up
and removed his pants and shorts, continuing to beat his meat.
Each time he stroked his cock, he saw something else that drove
him crazy. Jim’s hands were filled with breast flesh. He lowered
his head to suck on the pert nipples and tweaked them softly with
his teeth.

Donna’s groans were now music to Don’s ears. Another man had
his fingers in her pussy. Jim would pull the slick covered
fingers from her gushing hole and rub the button of her ass hole.
Moving slowly down from her nipples, Jim began kissing the swell
of her belly, biting her lightly on the hip bones. This made her
jump half way off the bed. She grabbed Jim’s head and tried to
push him into her hair-covered cunt. He resisted and continued
his efforts slowly. His tongue traveled all around her love box,
teasing the soft hairs and licking her thighs. Closer and closer
his lips came to her love button. In a quick motion, Donna moved
toward Jim’s raging penis. Her lovely lips opened and she slid
the length of Jim’s cock into her mouth, sucking hard. Up and
down this immense shaft her mouth moved. Don could see the trail
of his wife’s saliva on this man’s thick bone.

Jim mouth suddenly opened and covered Donna’s swollen cunt
lips. His tongue drove deeply into her hole as he tasted her cunt
honey. He sucked on her clit, bringing it into full hardness. It
was like a small spear between his hungry lips. Don’s eyes were
glued to them as he saw breasts moving like jello and buttocks
rippling in rhythm with their oral movements. Suddenly, Donna
stiffened, pulled Jim’s cock from her mouth momentarily, slammed
it deep inside her throat and climaxed in Jim’s mouth. She poured
her love juices into Jim’s sucking mouth as her hips gyrated
quickly against his cream-covered face. It seemed like it would
last forever. Finally, her buttocks began to slow down. Her
screams were muffled by the enormous bone in her throat. They too
subsided. Jim was still very stiff as Donna removed him from her
mouth. “Would you mind if we took a small break so I can have
something to drink honey?” she asked.

“Not at all Donna,” Jim responded as he looked at Don and
rolled his eyes. Donna looked over at Don with surprise as she
saw his erect penis in his hands.

“Ya know Jim, I don’t really blame you. I guess we did get
out of hand a little. It seems that Don and I have really turned
you on from the looks of it. Now that is a thing to be proud of,”
she said with a smile, about his cock, reaching for a water
glass. Don felt a little self-conscious as he let his cock fall
from his hands. Jim and Don both watched the sway of Donna’s but-
tocks and breasts as she walked slowly across the room with her
water. Her entire body was a deep pink with exertion. She
returned to Jim on the bed and offered him a sip. He took it
gratefully.

“Don, it seems like forever since I’ve seen another man’s
penis, and Jim’s is great looking, don’t you think?” Donna said.

Jim responded, “well, I really don’t get into dicks with the
possible exception of my own, but I’m glad you like it.”

“You’re not jealous honey?” Donna asked of Jim as she
settled back into his arms. Her breasts flowed into the hollow of
Jim’s chest as she offered Don a view of her pink buttocks, her
eyes searching for Don’s cock.

Jim said, “no Donna, I’m not jealous. In fact it would ex-
cite me if you touched his cock. Jim said as he grinned over her
head at Don. Don returned the grin and moved toward the bed.
Donna rested the glass on the night stand as Don approached.
Don’s half-hard penis came within close proximity to her face.
She began to reach up to touch it and stopped to look at Jim. He
nodded his support, and she again reached for Don’s cock. It took
very little for Don’s cock to rise again. She stared up at Don in
a sheepish manner and began to stroke it. Jim’s hand cupped one
of her ample breasts as Don stepped closer. Don reached out and
ran his fingers through her hair slowly, urging her lips nearer
his now huge rod. Donna could see the fluid at the tip of Don’s
cock. She turned her ass to Jim and took the first few inches of
Don’s thick bone in her mouth. Donna took more and more of Don’s
penis into her mouth as Don saw Jim begin to manipulate Donna’s
hairy pussy. Jim then got on his knees and brought Donna to hers.
Donna moved without loosing her grip on Don’s penis. She reached
around and grabbed Don’s buttocks and pulled him deeper into her
mouth.

Jim moved behind Donna running his hands over her rounded
ass cheeks. His hand dipped down into the crack of her ass and
collected some of her juices. He raised his hand to his nostrils
to savor the aroma of her womanhood. He stroked his bone into
full erection as he placed saliva in his hand and applied it be-
tween her bush to Donna’s cunt lips. Aiming the arrow of his
shaft at her gaping love tunnel, Jim eased his huge cock into
Don’s wife. He slowly worked his penis into her body until her
could see the button of Donna’s ass hole press against his hairy
belly. He started to move in and out of her hole.

Faster and faster his slick bone drove home. His balls were
bouncing off of Donna’s clit increasing her excitement. Jim could
take no more as his eyes riveted on his juice-covered cock split-
ting her cunt hairs as it drove into this musky tunnel. Her
beautiful ass cheeks were in his hands wobbling wonderfully. It
was too exciting. He began to grunt. As she felt him stiffen in-
side of her squeezing sheath, she mashed her buttocks into his
thighs to gain deeper penetration.

Don was now driving his tool with increased fervor inside of
his wife’s sucking mouth. With the beauty of this rare moment,
Donna felt both lovers go off at once. Gobs of thick cream were
pouring into her slippery cunt hole. Don’s jism squirted hotly
into her sucking mouth. Her mind was spinning as she experienced
one of the most earth-shaking climaxes in her memory. She col-
lapsed beneath both men. All three participants remained motion-
less for quite some time. It was Jim that first got up from the
bed and went into the bath room. He washed up and returned to the
room with his trousers on. He poured himself a drink and took a
seat at the table. Don said, “is there any more of that? I think
I need a drink too.” Jim poured Don a drink and delivered it to
bed side. Donna had the most wonderful smile on her face.

She soon got up and moved toward the bath room. Jim thought
how sexy this woman was. He asked Don after Donna was out of ear
shot, “Do you feel OK about this Don?”

“I’ll tell you the truth, I do have some guilt feelings
about it. I think they will go away without too much problem. I
am concerned about Donna. How do you think she will fair?” asked
Don.

“Well, there’s only one way to find out. We still have to
change back remember?” stated Jim as Donna returned to the room.

“Change back to what?” Donna quizzed while returning to “Jim
on the bed.

Jim responded first, “Donna, how do you feel about every-
thing that has happened?”

“I feel great. I have never felt so sexy. I have never had
such a good climax. I don’t really think I feel guilty, and now I
am sure that I wouldn’t be jealous if you made love to another
woman either Don,” Donna said.

“I am not Don,” Jim stated as he clapped his hands twice.
Donna had a look on her face as if she didn’t know where she was.
Her head turned from one to the other and back again.

“Holy christ! Holyyyyyyy chrissssst! You two switched
places. Don do you mean that I was making love to Jim before you
agreed to let me touch his cock?” Donna asked incredulously.

“That’s it honey. You wanted to. You said that you wanted
to. I wanted you to. I know that he did. Everything happened the
way it should have, and I love you more than ever. Please tell me
you enjoyed it and you’re not feeling bad,” Don pleaded.

Donna was comfortable with the events of the day. Twice
before they left she experimented with making love to two of her
favorite actors. Once she made it with both of them. Jim was not
really sure whether Don was making love with anyone in par-
ticular. He knew that he could if he wanted to. Jim felt great
about what he was able to do for Don and Donna as well as for
himself. This was one of the hottest long weekends he had ever
had. They agreed to do this again one day, and Jim hoped that he
would have a chance to see Bridgit again also.

A sweltering unseasonable heat met Jim as he left the of-
fice. He had been so busy with the rigors of a new week that he
hadn’t even the opportunity to stop for lunch. Just as well, he
thought. It wouldn’t hurt to shave about three pounds or so. Jim
fired up the air conditioner and headed for home.

His mind wandered to a new computer bulletin board friend he
had met the previous day. Ed seemed like an average guy with an
interest in improving his sex life. He and his wife Linda lived
in a little town near Pittsburgh, were in their forties, appeared
to be devoted to one another, but something seemed to be missing.
Ed and Linda weren’t alone. Many couples experience this common
phenomenon after being married for many years. Ed was interested
in breathing a little new life into their relationship.

Jim had been jumping around the computer system from door to
door when he was paged by Ed. As most people, Ed seemed in-
credulous about the use of hypnosis in sex. He couldn’t believe
that so many wonderful things could be accomplished by the use of
hypnosis. It all seemed supernatural and frankly, so much bull.

After Jim had the opportunity to share some of the methods
and analogies of hypnosis, Ed became more interested and wondered
whether this may be the direction he should take. Jim’s biggest
challenge seemed to be convincing Ed that is was normal to want
to make sex more exciting. In response to Jim’s questions, Ed ad-
vised him that he and Linda had never actually shared any fan-
tasies with one another. Ed had wanted to experiment with
threesomes as one time, but Linda seemed to be somewhat put out
about it. She had never indicated an interest in making it with
anyone other than Ed. Jim advised Ed to try to draw Linda’s in-
terests out through conversation and to get back to him so he
could prepare an approach for them.

The following evening when Jim signed on to the system there
was electronic mail for him. He always got excited when there was
a message for him. It was a lot like getting a letter that didn’t
have one of those little windows in it that meant the dirty “I”
word – invoice. Ed indicated that he was able to determine one
significant thing in his conversation with Linda. She was crazy
about Patrick Swazee. She had indicated that although she was
devoted to Ed, Patrick could park his shoes under her bed anytime
he wanted to. Ed shared that he was a little jealous, but oddly
enough, somewhat sexually excited by the prospect of Linda making
it with someone like that.

Jim prepared a message to leave in the electronic mail sys-
tem for Ed. He indicated that chances were likely that Linda
could mentally substitute Ed for Patrick Swazee. He cautioned Ed
that much of the success of this effort had to do with whether or
not he did anything to make Linda feel guilty. If they would like
to try it, Jim would be happy to help them. He went on to say
that it would probably take a good deal of convincing on Ed’s
part to get Linda to agree. Instead of visiting the house, Jim
wanted to know what interests they had that would enable him to
meet them socially. He signed off and waited for Ed’s reply.

The next time he signed on to the system another message was
waiting for him. Ed indicated that he thought that Linda found
the idea to be exciting but had some concerns about hypnosis and
the proverbial trust factor. They didn’t know Jim and were a
little concerned about meeting him. Ed also explained that each
Wednesday he and Linda went to a local bowling alley with several
other duffers. They would be agreeable to meeting Jim there but
didn’t want any of their friends to know that they were meeting
him for this purpose.

Jim answered that he would meet them at the bowling alley
and maintain a discrete approach to the matter. He hadn’t been
offended by their concern. It was natural, and Jim had encoun-
tered this skepticism almost every time he approached a situation
such as this. He made plans to meet with Ed and Linda and felt
confident that he would be able to help them in one fashion or
other. Each time Jim got involved in a situation like this was
erotic for him. It brought back so many exciting memories.

Wednesday had arrived, and the work day had come to an end.
Jim stood at his mirror combing his hair and straightening his
shirt collar. Assured that everything looked presentable, he got
into the car for his short journey to the bowling alley. This was
such a beautiful time of the year for a ride. The trees began to
fill with green, flowers painted the scene and the fresh air
filled his wandering mind. Pulling into the bowling alley parking
lot, Jim reviewed the available parking spaces and selected one
close to the door. He could always tell what kind of people fre-
quented a place by the look of the parking lot. This seemed to be
a nice bunch of folks by the type and number of cars adorning the
lot.

There was a nice looking mix of people in the place. Adjoin-
ing the bowling alley was a nicely accented lounge with soft rock
playing. Jim perused the lanes and saw that Ed and Linda could
have been any of seven different couples. He decided to take a
seat and wait for direction. One couple did seem to snatch peeks
at him more than any other. It appeared as though they were wait-
ing for someone. Soon one of the males of a couple foursome wan-
dered over with a towel in his hand. “Jim?” said the man.

“That’s me. You must be Ed. How are they rolling for you?”
Jim inquired. While waiting for his answer, he began sizing up Ed
and trying to figure out which of the ladies were Linda. It
really didn’t matter as both of them were lovely looking ladies.

“I think my balls are bigger than the ones we are using. I
bowl so badly that you have to have big balls to embarrass your-
self by bowling in front of everyone,” he laughed.

Jim assured him that he had plenty of company and that his
main claim to fame had never been bowling either. After some ad-
ditional small talk, Ed invited Jim over to meet Linda and their
friends.

Amenities having been exchanged with Linda, Karen and Joe,
Ed explained that Jim was a computer friend that they had met on
the computer bulletin board and they were going to have a drink
and discuss some of their computer ideas. He asked Karen and Joe
to join them.

Jim took a spectator’s position and watched as the bowlers
plied their hobby. It was Linda’s turn to toss the ball. Not
being an expert, Jim watched Linda make her initial approach. It
soon dawned on him that her approach was not what interested him.
Linda was about 5′5″ tall and about 125 pounds of loveliness. As
Linda picked up her ball from the return, she grasped it in both
hands in front of her. This movement provided the loveliest view
of her cleavage; soft white breasts with a healthy texture that
captured the attention of most men in the area.

His eyes were then drawn like magnets to her wonderfully
shaped buttocks. Her slacks provided cover but left very little
to the imagination. They were so perfectly lifted and separated,
and they danced so artistically as she made the short trip to
release her ball. He thought that he might just have to take up
this game on a regular basis just to return to this lovely view.

After the four bowlers had sufficiently tired themselves
with their less-than-300 game, they stowed their equipment and
headed for the lounge. Having been seated and drinks ordered, Jim
explained that he was a sociologist, worked with behavior
modification and came to find that he and Ed shared many common
interests about computers. Shortly thereafter, Karen and Joe ex-
cused themselves so that they could pick up their son at baseball
practice.

Linda, Ed and Jim all seemed to offer a sigh of relief as
the couple left. Additional drinks were ordered and the conversa-
tion continued. Ed began to offer apologies for his comments to
their friends, but Jim stopped him with a raised hand. “There’s
no need to apologize. This is your business, and if I don’t un-
derstand, I don’t have any business being here. My interest is in
seeing you both learn to enjoy life and one another more. I get
off on it. Some people collect stamps. I collect happy people.
It’s erotic as well as meaningful,” Jim smiled.

“I hope that’s not all you get off on,” Linda offered with
her own smile. She appeared to be somewhat attracted to Jim as
well. Jim felt several times as though she had been stealing
glances at him, but he couldn’t figure if it was that she was
concerned about him being there or happy that he was.

“No Linda, not at all. I’m just as normal as the next guy,
but I’m sure there would be people that would disagree with me on
that. If you don’t mind, I would like to be candid with you from
the beginning. Am I correct in assuming that you are both inter-
ested in improving both your relaxation techniques and your sex
lives?” Jim asked as he casually raised his eyebrows.

Having received a nod from them both, Jim went on. “The mind
determines what happens and how it is perceived. The reason that
we get sexually excited is that the mind sends messages from the
brain to various parts of the body. In a man’s case, blood is
sent to the penis, it fills, expands and becomes rigid. Very much
the same thing occurs when a woman becomes excited mentally. Once
again, our brain tells our system to increase the blood flow to
the extremities. The breasts, nipples and buttocks become more
sensitive as the nerves are exposed because of an increased pres-
sure of the blood supply. Mucous membranes are squeezed by the
blood flow which provides lubrication to the vagina. The inner
and outer lips of the vulva expand and become heavy.

“Our mind makes these things happen. Much of it has to do
with what we have programmed ourselves to consider sexy. That is
why we refer to men as tit men, ass men, leg men and the like.
Smell provides a real turn on for some people. Some folks are ex-
cited visually, while others can only be turned on by touch.
Again, the mind is doing these things for us and to us. As time
goes by, many people require additional or different stimuli to
provide excitement. You’ve heard the expression, ‘variety is the
spice of life,’ I am sure. That is what the expression refers to.

“Almost all of society has their secret turn-ons. Many don’t
speak of them, but most have them. My wife, for instance, never
demonstrated much interest in anything other than infrequent mis-
sionary style sex. She tried to please of course, but sex was not
very exciting for her. She never mentioned fantasies. I took for
granted that she didn’t have them, until one day she said some-
thing that led me to believe that she had. I questioned her about
it. Too immediately she denied that she ever thought of anyone
but me. After additional prompting, she admitted that she may
have had fantasies but didn’t have the courage to share them be-
cause it wasn’t normal for a “good wife” to think of anyone
sexually but her husband.

“This conversation occurred while we were in bed. As I was
able to pry more out of her, she noticed that I was not getting
angry. In fact, I was getting aroused; more aroused than she had
seen me in quite some time. Before the night was over we had made
love three times and climaxed with more pleasure than we ever
had. After that, fantasy had a place in our hearts and in our
pants. Sex had become better and more meaningful. I guess that’s
one of the reasons that we are still together and enjoy one
another so much sexually. I was able to assure her that jealousy
had no strength or place in our relationship so long as emotion
wasn’t diverted from each other. I would be jealous if I believed
that she loved someone more than me, but it only served to excite
me to think of her making it with someone else,” Jim concluded.

Linda seemed to be amazed at Jim’s honesty in explaining how
he perceived fantasy and jealousy. “Have you or your wife ever
made love to someone else Jim?” she inquired.

With a slight smile begin to curl on his lips, Jim remarked,
“On several occasions we have experimented. Jealousy did occur
the first time for both of us. Fortunately, our juices took over
and the situation was so hot, a wonderful balance resulted. Af-
terward, when we discussed it, our discussion just made us more
excited. We were left with a better understanding of our own
jealousy. Once I realized that although it turned her on, she was
also doing it for me, my jealousy went away and what was left was
pure excitement.”

“Quite honestly, you have captured my interest,” Linda said.
“Would you be interested in trying to help us achieve some of the
things that hypnosis has to offer?”

“If you are both not just interested to try it but hungry to
master it, I’d be happy to help you. This isn’t something that
you put a halfhearted effort into. You should commit to submit
your mind to it and attempt to practice periodically to improve
you own ability. When would you like to start?” Jim asked.

Linda looked at Ed for approval and direction. Seeing no ob-
jection, she said, “well it’s not too late now if you wouldn’t
mind following us to our place. It’s only about a mile and a half
down the road, and it’s in the direction you’d be traveling.”

Jim looked at his watch and agreed to follow them to their
home. He asked them to think about what they would like to ex-
periment on while they were driving back to the house. They
gathered their equipment, left a tip on the table and began the
short trip to their home. Jim followed, pleased that he had been
able to give them some initial good direction about hypnosis.

The trip was indeed short, and soon they had arrived at
their destination. Linda and Ed lived in a lovely neighborhood.
Their house and grounds were well maintained. The inside of the
house was furnished in a lovely fashion. Jim thought to himself
how proud he was that he had read these people correctly. They
seemed to be a very nice, average couple with their heads screwed
on right. After they were settled and Linda had prepared drinks
and some snacks, Jim asked, “did you discuss what you would like
to work on with hypnosis?”

Ed began, “we did talk about it a little, Jim. Linda and I
think that you may have something there with the jealousy theory
of yours. Both of us are willing to try making it with someone
else. We have agreed that if either of us develop a problem with
it we will stop and scrap the idea. Nothing ventured; nothing
gained. We believe that we are mature enough and love each other
enough that we can overcome it.” Linda illustrated her agreement
by nodding her head, but she said nothing.

Jim, in turn, placed each of them into deep hypnosis. They
were both excellent subjects. Much of it had to do with Jim’s ex-
planation of what would occur and their commitment to their sub-
mission. He gave them each post hypnotic suggestions that would
enable them to enter a deep trance state each time Jim snapped
his fingers twice while looking them in the eyes.

Through the use of additional suggestions Jim established
that in Ed’s eyes Linda would become Kim Bassinger and in Linda’s
eyes Ed would be Patrick Swazee. They would both be extremely
horny. They also did not have to waste time with amenities. He
increased their sensitivity, increased the intensity and length
of their respective climax and ended by giving them the instruc-
tions on how and when they would wake up. Additionally, Jim
would not be visible to them. Both were woken and Jim retreated
to a chair in the corner of the room to observe.

Ed sat there looking in awe at Linda. She was just as cap-
tured by Ed. They both stood and immediately began removing one
another’s clothing. Jim felt like a voyeur, but it was very ex-
citing. Linda was a knock-out and he could feel his cock begin to
lengthen. It was like watching his own personal porn film with
the added excitement that he helped write the script. He watched
as Ed’s hands went to Linda’s heavy, naked breasts. Ed’s eyes
gradually lowered to view this lovely spectacle. He tweaked her
lovely hardening nipples and filled his hands with tit flesh.

Linda moved her hands to Ed’s now-naked buttocks and
squeezed as she offered her hot lips to him. His thick penis
began its upward climb to erection leaving a slight trail of
seminal fluid on Linda’s baby blue panties. As his hands sneaked
inside the waist band of her panties and he filled his hands with
her ample ass cheeks, a deep moan escaped her lips into his hot
mouth. Jim watched as Linda’s buttocks were exposed to his view.
His rod was now rock hard and straining for a volcanic release.
Linda’s full buttocks were pressed together and separated inter-
mittently. Jim could see the deep crevice of her ass and the dark
patch of cunt hair. The smell of lust filled his nostrils and in-
creased his own excitement.

Soon Linda dropped to her knees and placed Ed’s extended
meat gently into her mouth. Ed squeezed his ass tight as he
pushed forward to gain depth. Linda lifted his balls and massaged
them gently as her wet mouth surrounded his straining cock. Each
time he pulled slightly out of her mouth, Jim was able to see the
residue of her saliva coating his huge penis; preparing it for
its trip into the depths of her slippery and swollen pussy lips.
Never had Jim seen such an erotic sight. He almost felt part of
the action, and his hand began to massage the grand lump in his
own pants.

Gently, Ed lifted Linda into his arms and headed for the
couch. He lower her as her breasts swayed like oceans of heavy
fluid contained only by the shores of flesh that surrounded them.
Her nipples were hard and extended. The tight nipple flesh pulled
hard at the ample breast which surrounded each. After settled in
a reclining position, Linda felt her legs being separated by Ed’s
strong hands. The muff of cunt hair which encircled her deep
honey pot separated to frame a slick pink gully. Jim watched as
her love cream seeped out of her hole and ran down into the deep,
warm crack of her ass to bathe her tight, quivering ass hole.

Ed’s lips began at the knee on the inside of Linda’s thigh.
Never was he this hot. His normally thick cock was as rigid as an
iron bar and felt like lead. It became so hard that he could feel
his hairy balls squeezed tightly against his body. His lips con-
tinued to move, painting Linda’s inner thigh with hot saliva.
Closer and closer they came to her gaping hot tunnel. The
fragrance of her wet sex visited his senses and made him tingle
with added excitement. Linda could feel his slightly rough face
teasing its way toward the magnet of her dripping, hair-covered
pussy lips. His hands continued to test the weight of her jig-
gling tits. Each time the palms of his hands brushed her tight
nipples it sent waves of excitement to her straining clitoris.

On his nose he could feel the moist hair which covered her
quivering cunt. Reaching from behind, spreading her tight but-
tocks, Ed used his fingers to spread the lips of her love tunnel.
Ever so gently he pressed his hard tongue into her fuck pit. Jim
removed his hand from his laboring penis, concerned that it would
ejaculate prior to their completion. His eyes remained glued to
the hot action. Linda was hotter than she had ever remembered
being. She swallowed Ed’s expanded cock, and he drove it into the
depths of her throat with his 5′11″, 155 pound frame. She could
feel Ed’s hairy balls rest on her chin as she filled her hands
with his buttocks and pulled him yet harder toward her. Grinding
her slick pussy into his gaping mouth, she could feel the weight
of her breasts as they bounced in the air and tingled her rubbery
nipples.

Ed broke the lock that they had placed their convulsing
bodies in. Turning her on her knees to present her taunt buttocks
to his gaze and aim, Ed leaned her soft breasts against the couch
and filled his hand with his own thick organ. Stroking it several
times to bring it to yet new length, Ed placed the spear-like tip
at the door of her womanhood. Linda couldn’t help herself as she
pressed backward trying to prematurely swallow his member with
her hairy, dripping sheath. Ed soon rewarded her as he smeared
love juices over the tip of his meat and began pressing its
length into the depths of her hole. Deeper and deeper it
traveled. What a vision! He could see the thick cock pole slip
effortlessly into the dark canyon of wet heat. As he withdrew, Ed
could see the evidence of her own juices glistening on his bone.

Jim watched as the strokes increased in intensity, speed and
depth. The sound of Ed’s thighs smacking against Linda’s firm ass
was music to his ears. Jim could see Linda’s ass wiggle as she
screwed it back to receive Ed’s advances. Her breasts jiggled so
voluptuously that Jim’s fuck bone almost went off without him
touching it. His gaze traveled to Linda’s face. The look on her
face was a combination of angel and demon. Her earthy grunts gave
him new reason to maintain erection. He loved the sound of
pleasure, and there was no doubt that Linda had never felt so
much unadulterated bliss. She was bucking wildly as the unrelent-
ing cock drove deep into her cavernous pussy.

The fever pitch that they had attained was soon met with the
ecstasy they sought. Linda was screaming, “fuck that deep cunt
Patrick. Fuck my hole with your hot meat and pour your come into
my guts.” She was indeed being made love to by Patrick Swazee. He
wanted her and he was taking her.

“You feel so damn wonderful Kim. Take my bone in your hole
and don’t let go. I want to pump my cock into you until it falls
off,” Ed responded. His cock was in Kim Bassinger’s tight pussy
and his hands were squeezing her rubbery ass cheeks. All at once,
Ed threw his head back and began a series of low grunts as he
pumped his cream into Linda’s pounding body. As if playing her
part in an orchestra, Linda buried the top of her head into the
couch and tossed her cunt up toward Ed driving bone. “Yes, Yes,
Yes, Harder, Harder, Now, Now, Ohhhhhh!” she screamed.

Soon they were spent and laying together in a half sleep.
They were too tired to move or didn’t care to. Jim placed them
both into another trance. He gave them post hypnotic suggestions
that they would wake up feeling wonderful, well-rested and remem-
ber everything that occurred during the love making experience at
the count of three.

“One, two, three; awaken feeling wonderful and sexy,” Jim
said as he clapped his hands loudly. They both opened their eyes
slowly. Their faces were graced with the most wonderful smile,
but each of them appeared to have experienced some embarrassment.
Jim couldn’t quite tell whether it was guilt or not. “How do you
feel?:

Linda began with a smile, “I feel like a truck hit me – but
right in the correct place. It was a truck I have wanted to be
hit by for a long time. I can’t really believe that Patrick
Swazee made love to me.” She soon noticed that she hadn’t a
stitch of clothes on. As Jim saw her concern, he offered an af-
ghan for her to cover up.

“I don’t think I have ever had a hotter experience. I was
convinced that Linda was Kim Bassinger. No — Kim Bassinger can
not be that good. This is unbelievable. I can’t wait to start
again. Thank you Jim,” Ed said meaningfully.

“There’s no need to thank me. I was just the facilitator.
You and Linda made it all happen. The next time we get together,
I want to teach you both how to be anyone you want, with anyone
you want, wherever you want to be and as long as you want to be
there,” Jim said. “Now I have a little drive ahead of me, and I
must be going. Beat’s the hell out of bowling, doesn’t it? Sit
tight. I’ll show myself out. Leave me a message on the computer
and let me know if you have any suggestions on how to improve the
process.”

Jim wasn’t out the door before Ed and Linda were deeply in-
volved in their own new experiment. Jim couldn’t get home quickly
enough so he could take care of his own hard business. On the
trip home his mind wandered to pat himself on the back for
another success story. These two were one of the hottest couples
he had ever helped. It didn’t do him any harm either.

CHAPTER SEVEN – MIND SEX

July of ‘91 had to be one of the most sweltering heat waves
in history for the mid west. Jim was sure that there was a direct
correlation between the heat and his libido. He seemed to stay
horny all of the time. He had to “get off” each night before
going to sleep, and he woke up with a cock hard enough to chop
oak trees. He knew that he was ready for a new adventure.

Recently, he joined a new computer bulletin board service in
Cleveland. It really seemed to be a great board because it had a
matching service that provided an outline of all of the sub-
scribers and what their interests were. He had pulled up a list
of about thirty singles or couples that were interested in meet-
ing him.

Sometimes the conversations got so hot on the computer that
he couldn’t help but stroke his tool while trying to type in
responses. Carla was one of the most exciting new contacts he had
made. Her profile indicated that she was married, 39 years old,
5′5″ tall, 135 pounds, long brown hair, blue eyes and hot to
trot. During one of their chats, she indicated that hypnosis in-
terested her, but she didn’t know much about it. They had made
arrangements to meet so that Jim could better explain the process
and benefits.

Jim arrived at the little town just east of Cleveland at a
little before seven o’clock on the agreed upon evening. By seven
o’clock he was parking the car in front of the address that he
had been given. Walking toward the door, he wondered how Carla
and her husband, Tom would be. To his pleasant surprise, the door
was answered by an extremely lovely creature wearing a small hal-
ter top that barely contained a remarkable set of breasts, a
short white skirt that accented her plentiful buttocks and high
heals that gave her legs the most interesting and seductive
curves. There seemed to be one bonus after the other. Her lovely
hair fell in soft curls to frame the face of an angel. “Please
come in Jim,” she said with what appeared to be a pleased look on
her face.

Jim stepped into the foyer and extended his hand in greet-
ing. Carla accepted his hand, cupped it and pulled it into her
breast as she kissed him on the cheek. He could already feel the
heat develop in his loins. Her eyes seemed to be memorizing him
as she said, “Come in to the den and have a seat while I get you
something to drink. Tom will be here in just a little while. I
sent him out for a few things. What would you like to drink?”

“A little demon rum and some diet cola if you have it,
Carla. You have a lovely place,” Jim offered as his eyes drank of
her form gliding across the room toward the bar. This was an ass
that he wanted to forever remember. It wasn’t that her skirt was
that tight. It was the material that seemed to cling in just the
right fashion to reveal each ass cheek in all its glory. They
moved like a symphony with each step she took. Having manufac-
tured Jim’s drink and preparing one for herself, Carla returned
to Jim and offered one of the glasses. Her return trip was just
as exciting. Her soft breasts bounced appealingly during her
return. She held her arms slightly away from her body as she
carried the drinks. This seemed to accent her ripened nipples.
Jim thought that she may becoming as excited by the prospects as
he was.

“Good heavens. You are a lovely woman, Carla. I don’t think
that I can keep my mind on anything with the way you look,” Jim
said.

With a devilish smile, Carla said, “do you want me to change
or cover something up?”

“I can think of a thing or two that I would like to see you
cover up, but please don’t change on my account,” he responded with a chuckle.

“Do you mean covering your long, hot cock with my tight,
hairy cunt hole while you suck on my big tits and bite my juicy
nipples? Or maybe cover up your thick bone with my lips while I
suck the last bit of cream out of your big balls.” In a flash she
had pulled up her halter top and her huge breasts bounced free.
“Conceivably, I could grease up these big knockers and let you
titty fuck me and come on my erect nipples,” she said in a soft
tone with a matter-of-fact look on her face.

Jim almost fell over backward in the chair he was in. Carla
began laughing, pulled down her top and said, “I’m just kidding
Jim. I hope that we do get to that point, but I just wanted to
see the look on your face.

“You did take me by surprise,” Jim smiled. “I do have to ad-
mit that you have two of the most remarkable tits I have ever
seen.” If this was any indication of what was in store for Jim,
he knew he had made the right choice to visit. His cock stayed
hard as they continued their conversation. Suddenly, they were
interrupted by the phone ringing. Carla got up from her chair and
made her way over to the phone. Jim could not take his eyes off
her swaying buttocks and almost spilled his drink.

Carla spoke softly, and Jim could not hear what she was
saying. After a short time she returned and explained that Tom
had gotten tied up and wouldn’t be able to join them for about an
hour or so. She asked Jim if he could explain the hypnosis
process. This he did. He went into enough detail to explain how
the trance state was induced and what could be accomplished
through the use of hypnosis.

“Could you make me believe that you or I are someone or
something other than who or what we are?” she asked leaning
toward him and offering a lucid view of her stunning cleavage.

“I really can’t do anything, Carla. I am only your guide.
You actually accomplish all of these things yourself. You can
lengthen the duration of your climax, make various parts of your
body more sensitive than normal or turn yourself or others into
anyone or anything you can imagine,” he answered.

“Let’s not wait, Jim. Put me into a trance now so I can see
what you’re talking about,” Carla pleaded.

“First I would like to just do some relaxation exercises. It
will enable me to determine what your ability currently is and
decide how far to go today. Is that OK with you?” he asked.

“You’re the boss. Just don’t turn me into a chicken or make
me chase cars,” she teased.

Jim placed her in an upright chair and began to induce the
trance state. She seemed to be responding rather well so he con-
tinued his efforts using the escalator approach. She was brought
lower and lower into the depths of her own mind. He then relaxed
each major muscle group by lightly touching the area and drawing
attention to it. This part was difficult for Jim because he had
to maintain his professionalism while touching her wonderful
body.

After a couple of tests to determine depth, Jim began to
give Carla post hypnotic suggestions that would serve to
demonstrate what she would be able to accomplish. He indicated to
her that she would not feel any different and would probably not
think that she had been asleep. Her nipples would not become
rigid unless her left ear was touched. Once that happened her
nipples would become as rigid as marbles.

He told her that whenever her left knee and left elbow were
touched at the same time, she would feel the pressure of hungry
lips on her nipples. Additionally, if these areas were slightly
shaken, she would feel a light electric shock sensation in her
nipples.

He then indicated to her that when she felt herself reaching
orgasm, she would be unable to come unless she was dancing nude.
When she started coming, all she had to do to double the inten-
sity of the orgasm was to pinch her nipples. If this night she
was made love to, she would be unable to reach a climax unless
Jim pushed her left nipple like a button. When this occurred, she
would have the most significant orgasm of her life.

In order to more easily go into a trance the next time, Jim
gave her another post-hypnotic suggestion. When he snapped his
fingers twice and told her to fall into a deep sleep, she would
immediately do so. She was asked and indicated that she under-
stood each suggestion. Jim told her that at the count of three
she would awaken, remember as much as she liked and feel terrific
and sexy.

At the count of three Carla’s eyes opened slowly and she had
an incredulous smirk on her face. She said, “I don’t feel as if
anything happened, Jim.”

“You don’t always feel as though something has happened. It
is only an altered state of consciousness. It’s not actually
sleep. However, now you have abilities that you have never had
before,” Jim explained.

“I don’t feel any different, but all of this talk about sex
has made me awfully horny. I can feel it building in me and I
want to explode,” she said almost apologetically.

“You are not all that horny, Carla. Your nipples are not
hard and they can’t get hard unless we impose one of the suggest-
ions I gave you earlier,” Jim assured her.

Carla looked at him as if her were crazy, “my nipples are
almost always hard, Jim.” She looked down at her breasts but did
not see the tell-tale impressions in her halter top. When she
raised her eyes to look at Jim, she had a look of disbelief on
her face. “This is insane. I hope to hell that you haven’t taken
something away from me. The sensitivity of my nipples are criti-
cal, Jim.

Jim said, “it only takes a second to fix. I want you to try
to make your nipples hard, Carla. Touch them, think of the hot-
test experience in your life, pinch them, pull on them or even
touch your pussy. When you are convinced that you have done
everything possible, let me have a try.” She followed Jim’s sug-
gestions point by point. First she removed her top. Her nipples
were lovely large patches adorning her breasts, but they were
flat and lifeless. She touched them gently at first and then be-
came more demanding. With her eyes closed tightly, she pulled and
pinched at the lovely pink patches to no avail. She began to
twirl the nipple of her left breast and her other hand reached
down into the heated gap between her legs.

“It feels great, but I can’t seem to bring any life into
them. Please tell me that you will take this away,” she said al-
most in a panic. He walked over to her and told her to keep her
eyes on her nipples. Then he raised his hand and touched her left
ear. Suddenly her nipples began to harden right in front of her
eyes. They became towering bundles of rigid flesh. They started
out pink and as they continued to grow they became almost red. A
smile soon replaced the frown and she lifted her breasts, began
to shake them and said, “all right! Now I have my lovely nipples
back again. You scarred the hell out of me, Jim. It is possible
that it was only a coincidence though. It could be the tempera-
ture in this room or apprehension about being so near a
stranger.”

“Would you like to go on to the next step of the
demonstration?” asked Jim. She indicated that she would. Jim
knelt down next to Carla and touched her left knee and left elbow
at the same time. Immediately her eyes shot open wide and another
look of disbelief found itself on her face.

“Jim, this is unbelievable. I actually feel a wet pressure
on my nipples. It feels like searching lips,” she said. Jim
removed his hands and the sensation went away. “Oh Jim, why did
you stop. It felt so incredible.”

“Try it yourself. Place your left hand on your left knee and
your right hand on your left elbow, Carla. Go ahead. You’ll be
pleasantly surprised,” he coached her. Carla did this and again
got a look of amazement on her face. “If you want to try some-
thing else, let me know when you are ready,” he offered.

She indicated that she was ready so Jim explained that she
should shake her left knee and left elbow. “Ohhhhhhhhhhhhhh. Oh
my lord. I never felt anything like this before,” suddenly she
stopped. “I can’t hurt myself doing this, can I Jim?”

Jim assured her that there was not any actual electricity
other than that which the mind provided. She returned to her ef-
forts and Jim watched; becoming more excited as he watched her
breasts jumping with delight. More and more she shook herself.
She had a determined look on her face and was trying feverishly
to climax. “Why can’t I get off. I’ve never felt this good
before, but I can’t seem to get off,” she said through clenched
teeth.

Jim explained that the only way she could come now was to
remove the remainder of her clothing and dance. She argued with
him and told him that she was almost there as she continued to
shake her knee and elbow. Suddenly she jumped up, removed her
clothes and started to dance wildly. This was the first time that
Jim had the occasion to see her lovely buttocks. As she danced in
one direction, her breasts and buttocks went in four separate and
quite distinct directions. The lovely muff of pubic hair began to
come to life after being matted down by her garments.

It wasn’t long before Jim noticed a strange look come over
her face. She danced over to the wall, held on to it and con-
tinued to dance. From the look on her face, it was apparent that
her climax was beginning. “Lean on the wall and pinch your
nipples, Carla,” Jim urged her. As she did this she let out a
scream that seemed to shake the room. She fell in jerking motions
to the floor, and Jim hurried to make sure that she did not get
hurt on the way down.

He gently helped her the last few inches to the ground, and
she continued to spasm in his arms; moaning and repeating, “Fuck,
fuck, fuck, myyyy fucking tits are going to explode; my cuuuunt
is a river on fire.” She continued to jerk with her hot flesh
pressed against Jim. He wanted in the worst way to bury his
rock-hard cock into her cunt; the hairy, hot hole that was
visibly leaking down both of her legs and the cheeks of her ass.
Jim held her gently as she tried to recover, stoking her hair and
whispering assurances to her.

Soon Carla began cooing. She told Jim that she hadn’t remem-
bered anything that exciting in a long time. Suddenly they heard
the door close and Tom said, “where is everyone at?”

“In the living room honey,” Carla reached for an afghan to
cover herself. “Jim has done a few experiments that I can’t wait
to tell you about.”

“You don’t have to, honey. I was on the porch and saw most
of everything that happened. I hope you don’t mind, Jim. One of
my weaknesses is voyeurism. I got off without touching myself.
That was hot. You’re the only one that still has a woody, Jim,”
Tom explained. They all laughed. Carla made something for them to
eat while Jim continued to explain some of the benefits of hyp-
nosis as a tool in sex. After a lovely snack, they returned to
the living room to finish their discussion.

“This talk has served to make me very horny again, guys.
What to you say we retire to more comfortable digs so you men can
teach me a few things,” Carla offered. Both men got up without
saying a word and began to follow Carla to the bedroom.

Carla didn’t waste any time getting the bed ready for the
threesome. Jim became increasingly horny as he watched her dance
about the room getting pillows and placing a tape in the VCR.
“Well are you guys going to just stand there, or are you going to
take those things off and join me,” she said as she plopped down
on the bed and struck an inviting pose.

Both men began taking their clothes off. Carla began to rub
her legs together as she compared their heavy cocks. Jim was
finished undressing first. He was likely more anxious as Tom had
already dropped a load of thick cream in his jeans while on the
porch. Before Jim was completely in the bed, Carla had reached
out and started to guide his growing penis into her mouth. Tom
soon joined them and ran his hands up her open thighs as he
watched her lips engulf Jim’s raging cock bone. Tom began licking
her soft, long legs at the knee, and Jim could feel the vibration
of her throat on his cock as she moaned at the pleasure Tom was
offering.

Tom’s hot mouth traveled further up her legs and soon her
wiggling buttocks were resting in his hands; painting them with
her juices. Tom’s tongue found its ultimate mark as it dipped be-
tween the hairy lips of her cunt hole and began flicking at her
clit. The excitement drove Carla wild, and she jammed Jim’s stiff
rod deep into her throat, licking his balls and moaning even
louder. Her lips began a lovely torture on the growing length of
Jim’s engorged shaft. Each time he buried his fuck tool into the
depths of her mouth, she reached out with her tongue and licked
his heavy, swollen balls.

Carla removed his raging bone so that she could turn him
over on his back. Tom got up from the bed to allow her to get
into position to return Jim’s glistening bone to her mouth. She
was on her hands and knees sucking on Jim’s rock-hard bone, and
her heavy pink tits bounced off of his thighs. Tom was now very
hard and approached Carla from behind. He lubricated her bushy
pussy a little more before he placed the head of his fuck snake
against the lips of her dripping cunt. Tom easily slid the length
of his tool into the depths of her fragrant hole as he filled his
hands with the flesh of her ass.

Carla’s moans continued to increase in volume as well as
duration. As Tom’s cock drove deeper and deeper, Carla attempted
to take Jim’s cock deeper with each thrust. Jim filled his hands
with her beautiful swaying tits and began tweaking the pink
marbles that rested on them. Carla responded by reaching up and
pinching Jim’s own sensitive nipples. This was more than he could
take. To stop himself from coming prematurely, he removed his
penis from her mouth and stood up next to the bed. “I don’t want
to get off yet. It’s too early. Just let me watch Tom poke your
lovely whiskers while your gorgeous breasts sway,” Jim pleaded.

Jim took a position in a chair next to the bed with one leg
thrown over the arm of the chair and slowly stroked his long
cock. Periodically he would have to remove his hand to delay the
inevitable. Soon Tom got a look of building tension on his face
and announced that he couldn’t hold on any longer. He was going
to come. Tom reached up, filled his hands with breast flesh and
drove his dick deep into Carla’s cunt hole. He began jerking
wildly as his cream filled her guts. Suddenly, Tom collapsed on
the bed next to Carla and left her on all fours. She looked like
a motor not connected up to the machine she was intended for.
With a look of pleading in her eyes she said, “I don’t know what
it is Jim, but I just can’t seem to come. Please come over here
and stick your bone in my hole and help me get off. I need more
cock, and I need it now.”

Jim didn’t need much encouragement. He approached the bed,
slid his hand under her breasts to feel their weight, down her
back, over her still-pumping buttocks and down into the wet,
hairy crack of her ass and slipped two finger into her moving
cunt. She groaned with pleasure as she anticipated the entry of
his swollen rod. Jim knelt on the bed behind her and lower his
nose to the cleft of her ass cheeks. He was intoxicated from the
aroma that filled his senses, and his cock grew even more than he
thought possible. Putting the globes of her ass into his hands,
he placed his cock into the wedge of her womanhood and drove his
cock into her hungry pussy. Immediately he began stroking his
pole into the depths of her greasy cunt as he bunched up her but-
tocks and watched his penetration.

Tom moved around in front of Carla and offered his swollen
meat to her panting mouth. She took it into her mouth and reached
up to massage his harry, heavy balls. Jim watched her head as it
drove like a piston on her husband’s tool. Jim could feel the
tightening in his loins that always preceded his climax. He
squeezed his buttocks together to gain deeper penetration and let
his load pour into Carla’s sucking cunt hole. His spasms con-
tinued as Carla continued to suck on Tom’s bone. When he had
drained every last drop of fluid from his balls, he left his
relaxing penis in her hole as she continued to pump. Soon Jim’s
meat had lost its length and fell out of her gaping love tunnel.
He heard a sigh of frustration. “Will I never be able to come?”
she sighed.

Jim instructed her to lie on her back and open her legs.
Then he told Tom to get in the saddle and drive his bone in Carla
as deep as he could. He sat on the edge of the bed and grabbed
her left breast as Tom continued his efforts. Jim lifted her
breast, kissed her nipple and pushed on it with his index finger
as if it were a button. Carla got a look on her face that was so
passionate that it temporarily frightened Tom.

Immediately, Carla’s cunt began to tighten and squeezed
Tom’s thick cock. “Holy christ…… I’m coming! Oh.. Fuck my wet
hole, mother fucker! Fuck it hard…. Harder… Squeeze me
cheeks, honey… Squeeze them hard,” she said in a jerking voice.
Her eyes rolled up in her head, and she began grunting in unison
with Tom’s moans. They pumped together, coming, and coming, and
it seemed like it would never end. Suddenly she reached out and
grabbed Jim’s cock, slammed it into her mouth, reached behind him
to squeeze his ass and shoved her index finger into his rubbery
anus. Jim began to come again. She drank from Jim’s pumping cock
as Tom drained the last of himself into her spasming pussy lips.

The three new friends collapsed into a near coma. After a
what seemed like a very long time Carla roused herself and asked
if anyone would like a shower. Slowly, as if awoken from hiberna-
tion, Jim and Tom followed Carla into the shower where they made
sure that every inch of her body was cleansed and dried. The eve-
ning ended with a night cap and a promise from Carla that she
would develop a new fantasy for the next time they met.

CHAPTER EIGHT – MIND SEX

Peggy had to go to Seattle to visit her sister Carol. It was
quite natural for me to go to one of the local watering holes
after I dropped her off at the airport. I walked in and offered
my amenities to some of the patrons and took a seat. I ordered my
usual drink and lit a cigarette.

After only a few moments, the bartender came over and told me
that I had a drink coming on the couple in the second booth. I
looked up and saw Cindy, a masseuse that both Peggy and I had
visited several times over the past few years. She shared my
interest in hypnosis, and often used relaxation techniques in her
massage therapy. Cindy looked wonderful. It seemed odd to see her
out of “uniform.” She generally wore sweats when she worked. That
outfit served to hide the obvious charms that she possessed. She
was wearing a low cut electric blue fitted dress that hugged
every lovely curve and accented her bosom, tiny waist and hips.
Her lovely cleavage separated her stiffened nipples which pressed
against the thin material of her dress. I walked over to her and
thanked her for the drink. Cindy introduced me to a pleasant but
most assuredly intoxicated Gary, her husband.

They asked me to join them, and soon I was comfortably situated
in the seat next to Cindy, across from Gary. Her warm thigh
intermittently swayed into my own as she talked about Gary just
having been promoted to district sales manager of his firm. They
had been out celebrating. I had difficulty keeping my eyes off of
her swaying breasts and pointed nipples.

As Cindy’s thigh continued its halfhearted assault on my leg in
tune with the music, I began thinking about the several times I
had visited her at her health club. She was always exciting but
never anything but professional. I could remember wanting her not
to be professional, but none-the-less she had been. I would have
been crazy not to want her. She was about 5′8″ tall, dusty blond,
heavy breasted with a tight waistline and lovely fanny that
hinted of moving under her loose-fitting sweats like a symphony.

As Gary continued to drink, I could feel her warmth touching
me. Soon Cindy suggested that it was time to go. With great
difficulty, Gary fumbled through his wallet and offered the
server his plastic money. Upon rising to exit, Gary began to
waiver and Cindy caught him with my help. I felt the weight of
her right breast as I reached around Gary to hold him aloft. The
flesh of her lush tit rose from the shelf of her bra to bulge
freely into my sight. She looked at me and asked for my
assistance getting Gary to the car. Once Gary was positioned in
the front seat of the car, Cindy brushed by me and offered her
full lips in gratitude for my assistance. The next move was mine.
I asked if I could follow her home as Gary was beyond repair, and
she would have a difficult time putting him to bed. She accepted
my offer and we were off to their home.

I hadn’t done that much work in recent memory. Gary was no
small guy, and dead weight is hard to move. After what seemed
like a very long time he was settled neatly in bed in the arms of
Morpheus. Cindy and I returned to the comfort of her den and
laughed at the memory the three of us had created. Her offer of a
nightcap was graciously accepted before she put some music on the
C.D. player and excused herself from the room. She soon returned
to her own drink wearing a cute but tight-fitting pair of
pajamas. They were a pink, thin cotton outfit with a trap door
arrangement that left nothing to the imagination. Her heavy
breasts were well outlined, and as the cotton moved over her
lovely breasts, generous nipples began to perk up.

And there I sat wondering whether she was aware just how crazy
she was driving me as she sat down next to me on the couch. I
took a long draw on my tall drink and rolled my eyes casually. As
our glance met she asked me what was the matter. I told her that
she was absolutely lovely in that outfit. Her response was that I
was just being kind. I began to tell her that I was never kind
when it came to lovely women, but I never got the words out. She
pressed herself against me and her lips found mine. I felt the
blood begin to rush into my growing cock.

She quickly moved away and I started to apologize for being too
forward. I didn’t get those words out either. She interrupted me
by saying, “you don’t mind if we get just a little kinky do you,
Jim ?” She walked over to the video tape camera which rested on a
tripod and turned the system on. My image, sitting on the couch,
soon began to appear on the large screen television. She panned
the camera and the room appear to move. The camera came to rest
on the fireplace at the far end of the room. She zoomed the lens
of the camera so that only the fireplace filled the screen. “Have
you ever watched a woman masturbate, Jim? If you don’t mind I’m
going to tape this episode so we can watch it later. Just sit
back and relax.”

I watched Cindy walk toward the fireplace. “Don’t watch me,
Jim. Watch the screen. You won’t miss anything,” she said as she
continued her trip to the far end of the room. As she appeared in
front of the screen, she began to roll her shoulders forcing her
heavy breast to dance gently for the camera. She grabbed her tits
and pushed them together letting them fall and bounce. Her hips
were thrown wide, providing a shelf for her hands and her fanny
was pushed back. Slowly her hands disappeared behind her ribs and
gently slid down her back coming to rest on her fanny.

I could see that she was unbuttoning the trap door to her
pajamas. Soon she began to turn to expose her firm buttocks to
the screen and my view. The cleft between her ass cheeks was deep
and dark f rom this distance. I couldn’t see the bottom of her
ass cheeks or her pubic garden, but my imagination started to run
wild. My cock was straining inside of its trouser prison. “You
can start taking t hose things off any time you like, Jim. Your
poor cock will choke to death if you don’t let it breath. Do you
like what you see so far?” she asked with a husky voice.

I began to remove my trousers and responded, “I love it, Cindy.
You’re right. If I don’t get these things off soon, my cock will
explode. Please continue. Your ass is absolutely beautiful.”

Cindy crossed her arms in front of herself, grabbed the waist
band of her top and lifted the pajamas top from her body. As she
pulled the top over her head, her ample breasts danced for the
camera. Next her thumbs were hooked inside of her bottoms and
they were pealed from her ribbed belly, her pubic mound, her
muscular thighs and off her feet. She turned a forty-five degree
angle from the cam era as she bent over to pull the elastic band
anklets free. I could see her breasts dip to inverted mountains
of flesh. Her hips and profile of her buttocks was driving me
wild. I began to stroke my fuck pole as she assumed an indian
style sitting position. She had a wonderful full crop of curly
pubic hair. It began low on her shapely belly and promised a
great texture as it disappeared between the darkness of her long
thighs.

Her chest bent forward, her eyes closed and she cupped her
dangling tits. Thumbs and forefingers started to gently twist her
growing dark brown nipples. A moan escaped her slightly parted
lips as s he continued to roll these dark rubbery marbles. “Oh
fuck, Jim. My nipples are so hard thinking about your lips and
teeth on them. I can almost feel you pulling on them and sucking
them like a hungry baby. I can feel your hands lifting my heavy
tits and squeezing them tightly. Do you like the way they wiggle
and bounce when I move? How about this. Do you like the way they
look when I lean back a nd they spread over my chest?” she asked
with a seductive voice.

“I can almost taste your thick brown nipples between my teeth.
I had no idea that this could be so exciting. My cock is so hard.
Your heavy tit sacks look wonderful regardless of what position
their in. My imagination is running wild now. I can imagine them
hanging heavily as you are on your knees offering me your ass. I
love to fuck dog style and reach under you and hold your lovely
breasts. It also gives me access to your hard clit. Would you
like me to fuck you on your knees while I play with your tits and
rub your clit?” I asked as I watched her hands travel over her
stomach and head toward the dark patch of pubic hair.

“Oh fuck. I can see your cock bone sliding in and out of my
split hairy pussy. When you pull it out, it is all covered with
my creamy juices. When you push it back in, it pulls some of my
cunt hair in with it and increases the friction of our fuck. When
its driven deep, our pubic hair mix together,” she continued her
verbal love making.

I was stroking my cock meat as I watched her enter her cunt
hole with her fingers. She leaned back on her haunches, and her
tits were swaying back and forth. One hand reached up to feel the
weight of her thick tit. She removed her fingers from her leaking
pussy, looked up at me and put her fingers in her mouth, sucking
and licking the honey from them. Slowly she reached behind her to
a box resting on the lip of the fireplace. She reached inside the
box and removed a large flesh colored dildo. It was almost eight
inches in length and had heavy balls attached to it. At the
bottom was a switch. She placed it into her mouth to add
lubricant to it as well as to excite me. The surrogate cock was
lowered and placed at the entrance to her greasy hairy pussy. She
closed her eyes, threw her he ad back and put the first couple of
inches into her slippery box. The sight was driving me crazy.
Deeper and deeper it went until she was completely impaled on
its length. She sat on it fully and rocked back and forth as she
pinched frantically at her thick rubbery nipples. “Oh fuck, baby.
This is good. The vibrations are driving me insane. Now I’m going
to turn it on high speed, Jim. Imagine that it’s your strong bone
in my tight slippery cunt hole. Wouldn’t you love to pinch my
fucking hard nipples? Wouldn’t you love to suck my big tits and
squeeze my ass cheeks? Well, you’re going to mother fucker. Go
ahead and stroke that bone, cunt lapper. You’re soon going to
pour all of that hot sticky fuck cream on my tits, my ass and in
my fucking guts. I want gallons of that hot fuck juice in my
mouth,” Cindy spoke in well-defined words in an effort to
increase my excitement.

Her hands continued to manipulate her exquisite breasts, and
soon her eyes shot wide open and then rolled up in her head. She
looked lovely as she began her climb to ecstasy. “Oh, mother
fucker, I’m cuming! Oh shit, this fuck’n rod in my pussy feels
wonderful. Soon your thick cock will be buried in my furry hole.
I want to suck that bone, and I want you to stick your tongue in
my honey pot, honey. Get over here,” she demanded.

I didn’t require any further direction. I rose and approached
her with my rod bouncing up and down in time with my steps. My
hot nuts were tight against my body because their swelling
increased by the hot scene unfolding in front of me. I reached
down and pulled her to her feet. She extracted the still
vibrating dildo, and turned it off with one short movement,
discarding it on the floor. My lips quickly found hers and her
hot tongue entered my sucking mouth. I could feel her moist mound
come in contact with my thigh as my stiff fuckstick stabbed into
her belly. A moan escaped her hungry lips and traveled into the
depths of my lungs. Cindy’s resilient breast globes pressed their
erect nipples into the hair of my chest. My trembling hands
reached behind her to treat themselves to the rippling mounds of
ass cheeks.

My thick cock continued to grow and deposit small trails of
silvery fluid on her well-shaped stomach muscles. Suddenly she
reached between us and began to pinch and twist both of my stiff
nipples. My fingers could feel her perspiration begin to travel
down the smooth crack of her ass. The smell of her hot sex rose
to invade my nose, increasing my excitement. Maintaining a firm
grip on her strong buttocks, I reached up to feel the weight of
her heavy breast as it teased by chest. My fingers then traveled
down to the forest of thick cunt hair to find her oily, pouting
pussy lips spread with excitement. I gathered her hot emissions
and began to smear them between her legs and over her finely
textured fanny.

“I need you to eat my cunt, Jim. Will you put your lips on my
hot pussy and drive your tongue inside of my fuck hole?” she
asked between pants.

“Lay down, sweetheart. Let me taste your honey pot. I can’t
wait to smell your sex. I need to drink your cum,” I said as I
slowly lowered her to the carpeting in front of the fireplace.
Placing my hands behind her strong thighs, I gently spread her
legs to reveal her glorious, hair-shrouded vulva. A pink, flower
appeared in front of my hungry eyes. She had such a beautiful,
wet pussy. I smelled the fragrance of her heat and began to
breath heavily onto her hairy cunt hole. She began to moan and
lift her hips to expedite her joy. I continued to tease her
leaking hole with my hot breath and intermittently dip the tip of
my tongue into her body.

She jammed my cock bone into her mouth in one fell swoop. As I
felt the tip of my love tool lodge in her moaning throat, I was
compelled to shove my tongue deep into her hole and completely
cover t he lips of her pussy with my lips. We were locked in an
embrace, our mouths filled with one another’s genitals. She
rocked her hips in and out against my mouth, and I continued to
drive my fucker between her sucking lips. Suddenly I stopped. I
didn’t want it to end this quickly. I would have spilled my seed
into her sucking mouth if I pumped once more.

“I don’t want to blow yet, Cindy. Just let me look at you for a
minute,” I said as I rolled over and filled my eyes with her
lovely, aroused flesh. She grasped her breasts, lifted them to my
gaze a nd began to roll the nipples with her fingers. She had the
look of a hungry animal on her face. She smiled and stood in
front of me. Her hands continued to travel her body from her
heavy breasts to her rounded ass cheeks as she turned around for
me. I didn’t dare touch my raging cock for fear that it would go
off.

“I think you need a drink, Jim. I’ll be right back,” she
whispered as her legs stretched into a slow gait toward the bar.
The fire painted each lovely curve during her short journey. As
her hot body moved the shadows of the flame from the fireplace
danced and frolicked across her taunt skin. She returned to my
side and offered me another glass of cool wine. “You can take a
short break and then you’re in for trouble, mother fucker. Do you
like it when I call you mother fucker? Do you like it when I talk
to you about fucking and sucking?” she asked as her body lowered
itself into its seated position. I loved the way her breast sacks
swayed as she negotiated her wine glass and sat down.

“It drives me wild her hear your hot words. Each time you utter
a sound to me, I turn to fucking butter and I think about your
butter pouring out all over my cock bone,” I teased back.

“Well then finish that wine, cunt-lapper. I don’t care if you
cum quickly. The next time you’ll last even longer; and there
will be a next time. I’m not going to let you out of here until
I’m done,” she threatened in mock fashion.

The wine was soon gone, and I found her lips wrapped around my
torpedo once again. I filled my hands with the cheeks of her ass
and began to lather her up to drive my pole to her depths. She
grasped my stretched penis roughly and ran her teeth slowly and
softly over its purple head. My tongue dipped between the well
defined gully between her pubic hair patch. The texture of her
cunt hair felt good on my slowly moving tongue, and the smell of
her womanhood was intoxicating. I pushed it into the pink
crevice, gathered up her thick juices and deposited them on the
lips of her swollen vulva. “I can’t take it any longer, Jim. You
have to stick your fuck stick into my cunt hole, now,” she cried.
“Fuck me, you wonderful cunt lapper. Bury your pole in my slimy,
hairy cunt.” I rolled onto my back and pulled her toward me. She
had a hungry look on her face and didn’t take her eyes off my
bone. I watched as her ample breasts sway as she moved herself
into position over my thick penis. My
eyes traveled to the point of imminent contact, and I saw her
pink quim peak out of the wet hair that surrounded it. She
grabbed the head of my tool and placed it neatly between the
swollen lips of her pussy. I could feel the slippery skin of her
twat painting the helmet of my bone. She rubbed it between her
legs to prepare it for penetration. All the while her lovely tits
continued to dance for me. Her nipples were like sharp, angry
darts seeking a target. My hands reached up, lifted their weight,
squeezed and kneaded the flesh and allowed them to fall again to
bounce and jiggle.

Quickly, my cock bone was buried to its limit. She grunted
furiously and began to fuck her hips back and forth over my
hidden hammer. The texture of the skin of her hips was beautiful
as she continued to ride my monster. My hands moved back and
forth between her magnificent mammaries to her strong buttocks.
Each time my hands fell into the crack of her ass where it met
her honey pot, they became soaked with her love cream. I smeared
it over the cheeks of her ass and on her swollen nipples. The
sensation of my slippery hands, greased with her fluids, gliding
over her stiff nipples was to much for her to take.

Cindy let out a muffled squeal and became as rigid as a board.
Her eyes widened, as if in fear, and her mouth remained open in a
soundless scream. Her rocking continued as the muscles of her
love sleeve gripped the meat of my driving cock. Her words came
in a jerking fashion, “fuck…. me…. fuck the…. shit out
of…. me, mother…. fucker. Suck on my tits. I accommodated her
every demand, with glee, as well as I could. I couldn’t take my
eyes from her passion-ridden face. Her teeth were clenched as she
continued, “drive that cock in me. I want it all. I want your
cum. Shoot your hot load.”

That’s all I needed to cause my explosion. I could feel the cum
begin its journey from the depths of my hairy balls as my eyes
returned to her heaving tits. My nuts tightened, my cock became
as rigid as it had ever been, and my cream started to travel up
the shaft of my hose. “Ride it, you lovely bitch. Ride my cock
while I squeeze your beautiful ass cheeks. Pour your cream in my
lap and feel my dick in your greasy pussy,” I said as my eyes
involuntarily rolled back in my head. My buttocks tightened as I
drove my bone one last time into her wet heaven. I could feel the
cum shooting into her guts and further lubricating my shaft. She
continued to ride as if my bone would never go away. The overflow
of my juice began to spill from her tensing pussy and collect on
my burning balls. This was some remarkable woman. I could only
wonder why I had never pursued this lovely creature before. She
had collapsed on me, and we rolled over so that she remained
cradled in my arms with her face buried in my chest.

After a short period, she stirred and asked, “are you ready for
round two, stud-puppy? She began to rub her breasts against my
belly and grind her wet box against my leg. “We can get ourselves
worked up again by watching our little movie, if you would like.”

I had never seen myself fuck before. I thought it would be
great to see that. “Be my guest,” I said as I waved with one hand
in the direction of the video player. She got up slowly and
sensuously moved toward the video equipment. She put the system
on rewind, recovered the remote control and went to the bar to
get us another drink. As we sat there sipping and cuddling, she
put pushed the play button on the remote, and we settled in to
see this new epic.

I couldn’t believe how vivid the display was. Here I was
sitting with this lovely woman, watching her masturbate for me.
Soon my cock began to stir and grow to its previous heights. I
played with her tits and her ass flesh while I watched the T.V.
screen.

Her long fingernails reached for my nipples and started to
tease them. My hand was resting in the moist crack of her ass,
squeezing the flesh of her buttocks. “I love the look on your
face as the dildo is moving in and out of your hairy pussy,
Cindy,” I whispered in her ear as her cream continued to fill my
hand.

“And I love the way your cock grows when you watch me on the
screen. Your cock feels to good in my hand. Watch how it
continues to get harder as we talk about it. See how the head is
becoming more smooth and deeper in color. Let me polish it for
you a little bit, Jim,” she said as she turned to place it in her
mouth. My fingers dipped deeper inside of her hairy, wet honey
pot as her lips glided over the head of my stiff organ. Then she
pulled it out and began rubbing it over her rubbery nipples.

To my utter surprise and infinite joy, I suddenly felt the
vibrator slip into her slippery pussy beside my probing fingers.
She drove it in deep as her lips returned to my raging penis. We
twisted into a “69″ position and my nose was soon offered the
fragrance of her twat. My eyes watched the dildo searching her
depths along side my fingers. In and out it went. Up and down the
moist crack it t raveled, teasing the swollen clit. Suddenly, she
withdrew the intruding vibrator, turned it off and bore down on
my thrusting hand and twisting fingers.

My mouth went to her dark pink clit and my tongue started to
provide stimulation. Her lips were traveling up and down the
length of my expanded member, and all of a sudden, I felt
something pressing on my anal passage. The pressure continued to
increase, and I could feel something entering my ass hole. Then
it dawned on he what it was when she turned it on again. It was
the vibrator. It rattled my buns and relaxed my rear passage as
it continued to travel inward. The sensation was unbelievable as
she twisted it to rub its base against my hairy balls as it
invaded my bung hole. I could feel my thick penis continue to
grow in her sucking mouth. “How do you like it, mother fucker?”
she asked as she continued her gentle assault on my ass.

My answer was wordless but definite. I began to rock my hips
back and forth serving to both bury my cock further into her
mouth and drive the plastic cock up my ass. Her tool became more
lubricated as the time progressed, and she began to twist it
while she drove it deeper and deeper. Soon, her toy was buried
deeply in my ass, and she turned the vibration up to a heavy hum.
My fucking rod, as if with a mind of its own, began a slow, long
vibration, consisting of one long spurt after another. I was
coming in a fashion that I was unfamiliar with. It seemed to come
from my toes and rock my b rain. My cum ridden balls were slowly
pumping gobs of thick cream into her sucking mouth. It was as if
I had no control over it or nothing to say about it.

As my vibrations continued, I filled my hands with slippery ass
cheeks and drove my tongue deep within her gushing pussy. The
aroma was wonderful. The scent of her hairy cunt hole filled my
senses, and everything seemed to be happening in slow motion. She
continued her efforts long after her own climax shook her body
within my clutching hands; long after she drank all of my sticky
juice. I was soaking wet with perspiration. Her heavy breasts
slid back and forth over my hairy belly as she settled in to
relax against my spent body.

With a husky voice she asked, “How was that for a little
variety, honey? Have you ever had a vibrator between these tight
buns?”

I spoke with difficulty, “I don’t think I have ever had a
feeling quite like that. It was great. I came longer than I ever
did. The smell of your sweet pussy, the feel of your ass meat in
my hands, and the feel of my cock lodged deep in your throat
drove my over the edge. You are fucking unbelievable, Cindy.”

“Well, it wasn’t bad for round one. There are a couple of ways
to look at it,” she said as rested her head on my thigh. “If this
turns out to be a boxing match, we will have eleven or fourteen
rounds to go, depending on which league you follow. If we relate
it to pussy, I still have eight lives. But I would much rather
think of it in terms of the encyclopedia, and tonight we only
touched on the ‘As.’ Let’s hope that Gary gets promoted early and
often.”

“Now wake up feeling wonderful and remember everything, Jim,”
Peggy said as she brought me out of my trance.

Turn about is fair play, I thought as I shook my head in
understanding.

CHAPTER NINE – MIND SEX

It had been a lousy week for Peggy. Faced with the prospect
of closing her boutique due to falling sales and not having found
a job as yet, she was depressed. Her children, away at college
seemed to be unusually demanding, and it seemed that she couldn’t
get anything accomplished. She was convinced that she needed some
diversion. It didn’t take long for her to realize that the only
thing that ever made the ugly world go away was the gut wrenching
orgasms that she had from time to time. Fast and furious fucking
would likely be her only salvation from the confusion that she
was currently feeling.

Although she had better and more frequent climaxes when they
used hypnosis, she sometimes became concerned that Jim loved fan-
tasy more than he did her. She preferred normal, fantasy-free
sex with Jim, but she knew that fantasy sex was his biggest
turn-on. He was obsessed with the thought of another man putting
his hands on her smooth breasts. His cock stayed as stiff as a
board each time he thought about another man sucking on her per-
fect pink nipples.

Her mind wandered at the sexy thoughts that began to invade
her mind. She thought about the many conversations that she and
Jim had over the years. He always assured her that she was excit-
ing and that it was a matter of pride. He wanted every man to
want her; to see her naked, exciting body; to taste her fragrant
honey pot; to hold her round, smooth buttocks in their hands. He
almost came each time he thought of another man’s long, thick
cock bone pounding inside of her twisting belly. That did it. She
would hint to Jim that tonight should be a fantasy night. Tonight
she needed to escape with Jim into her deepest fantasies.

Peggy called Jim at work and asked if he would be able to
come home early tonight. He responded by saying that he would try
to be home early and questioned her as to whether anything was
wrong or if she needed anything. “Just you Jim. Ya know, I think
tonight might be the night for us to escape into a wonderful fan-
tasy. Do you think you might be interested?” she inquired.

“Did you have anything particular in mind, honey?” Jim asked
as his mind and body began to react to the thought.

“I think that tonight I need to be a fucking slut. I need to
meet an absolute stranger… Richard Gear… Ya, Richard Gear
should fuck my brains out tonight. I need to have his hands on
me. I want him to such my big tits and make me come all over his
face. He can bring as many friends as he would like,” she of-
fered, knowing that she was driving Jim wild with anticipation.

“I’ll be home very early, honey. We can have a little light
dinner and dip into our minds as well as our bodies. Start to im-
agine thick, long cocks surrounding you, touching your skin, in-
vading your hot mouth and your dark hairy cunt hole,” Jim began
to tease as his bone began to leave traces of his excitement in
his pants.

Now it was Jim’s turn to think of all of the wonderful pos-
sibilities that lay ahead. Although he had experienced a few af-
fairs over the years, never had he found any woman that could ex-
cite him as much as Peggy could. Her body was perfect for him. He
had made love with women that had larger breasts, but Peggy’s
were perfect. They looked perfect, felt perfect and tasted per-
fect. It may have been her reaction to Jim’s attention to her
breasts. He wasn’t sure. He only knew that her tits exciting him
more than any others.

He had probed the depths of other women’s love tunnels, but
never did his cock get harder than with Peggy. It could have been
the well-defined lines of her lovely pubic patch. Maybe it was
the appearance of her fat cunt lips as they became excited and
full of anticipation. It could have been the taste of her sweet
pussy nectar. Again, he wasn’t sure. He only knew that she was
the best. Peggy loved to climax, and just the look on her face
when she got off drove Jim wild.

Peggy was blessed with the most lovely set of buttocks. Her
small but fleshy buns wiggled so nicely when she walked. It drove
him wild to fill his hands with ass flesh when he drove his cock
bone deep into her gyrating cunt. She loved to feel his strong
hands squeeze hard as they fucked fast and furious.

Jim’s cock was so hard thinking about Peggy’s lovely body
and about the prospect of her fucking someone else for him that
his hard cock almost went off in his pants. He had a raging
hard-on. He tried to hide it as he walked out to his secretary’s
desk to drop off a letter to be typed. He must not have been suc-
cessful because her eyes seems to be riveted to his crotch. She
looked away, raised her eye brows slightly and smiled. It must
have been obvious to her that Jim’s mind wasn’t currently on
work. “I’ll be leaving a bit early today. Please just take mes-
sages and make excuses for me,” Jim requested.

His secretary suggested with a chuckle as she walked over to
the copy machine that, “it may be a good idea to relax for a
little while and get your mind off the job. I’ll hold down the
fort.” She put a little extra wiggle in her ass, obviously think-
ing about what he would be up to.

The garage door opened as Jim pulled into the driveway.
Having parked the car, he extracted the flowers and candy that he
had acquired on the way home. He danced up the steps and into the
house as he announced that he was home. Setting down the candy,
he began looked for a vase for the flowers. A little water in the
vase and a slight spay on the blooms offered and pleasant picture
of the arrangement. Jim set down the vase on the dinning room
table and noticed that it was set for two. There was a pleasant
aroma as he passed through the kitchen. He reached for the oven
door and heard Peggy coming down the hall from the bedroom. “Hey,
get out of the oven before you ruin our dinner,” she said with a
chuckle.

Jim looked up to see one of the most lovely sights he could
remember. Peggy was standing there with an extremely low-cut yel-
low blouse, a tight, light green skirt, lace hose and high heels.
Her breasts were accented so well and her cleavage seemed to
beckon to him. The high heels promoted her lovely buttocks in
such a way as to make Jim want to touch them immediately. What
great legs, he thought. “First, you are going to go get out of
that suit, put something more comfortable on and I’ll make you a
cocktail. Dinner will be ready soon and we can get down to
business,” Peggy directed him as she swayed toward the cabinet
where the liquor was kept. Jim smiled, walked up behind her,
filled his hands with her breasts and placed his cock against her
well shaped ass.

“Yes young lady; whatever you say,” he teased as he headed
for the bedroom. Soon he reappeared and found his drink waiting
for him. Peggy sauntered over to the table with a glass of white
wine in her hand. She seemed to glide, and she knew that she was
beginning to drive Jim wild. She was proud of her breasts, but
embarrassed to let anyone else see them. Jim had often prompted
her to show off a little, but rarely did she ever offer her
charms to any one else’s view.

Soon dinner was ready, set and consumed. Peggy had done a
wonderful job. She didn’t overdo it. There was just enough to
suppress their hunger and not weigh them down.

“Jim, I know that you would like to see me making love with
someone else, and I think I understand why. Tonight I would like
you to hypnotize me, make me a prostitute and watch me get
fucked. I want to forget about anything and everything all night.
I just want to come until I pass out. Can we do that?” she asked
pleadingly.

“It excites me beyond words to hear you say that. You are
going to get so much cock tonight, you may never want it again,”
Jim whispered.

“I don’t think that’s possible, honey. I don’t think I can
ever get enough cock. I want to eat it, suck it, fuck it and rub
jism all over my aching tits. I want to feel that hot, thick,
sticky jelly running down the crack of my ass. I want it all,”
she assured him.

Jim told her to get comfortable in the chair, and he induced
the trance state in no time at all. “When you awaken, you will
find yourself in a lounge having a glass of wine. You are a pros-
titute. You don’t fuck simply for money. You do it because you
are a horny woman that can’t seem to get enough cock. You will be
approached by one or more men and asked to dance. Jim will be in
the lounge, and he will be able to see everything that goes on.
You will try your best to excite him by the way you interact with
whoever you are dancing with. The man who agrees to pay you five
hundred dollars will look and sound like Richard Gear. You will
ask him to show you his money. He will show you five one hundred
dollar monopoly bills and you will see them as real money. You
will direct him to follow you, knowing that Jim will be able to
see everything that happens. He will accompany you to your
bedroom and the rest is up to you. When I snap my fingers once,
you will awaken and remember everything as if it actually hap-
pened. Do you understand everything that I have told you?” Jim
inquired.

“Yes. I understand,” Peggy spoke softly. Jim went to the
game chest and retrieved the monopoly money.

“At the count of three wake up feeling wonderful, sexy and
extremely horny. One…. Tow…. Three…. Wake up; you are in
the lounge,” Jim instructed.

Jim moved over to the breakfast counter and sat on a stool.
He looked over at Peggy, and she threw him a seductive glance.
She crossed her legs in an inviting manner and bounced her foot.
Soon Jim stood up and walked over to the table. “Would you care
to dance?” he asked.

Peggy responded as she was getting to her feet displaying
her cleavage to its best advantage, “I would love to.”

The music played softly as Peggy fell into Jim’s arms. She
looked up into his eyes as she pressed her breasts into his
stomach. Jim had difficulty keeping his eyes off her breasts. He
could feel her press the mound of her pussy into his leg as she
seductively swayed with the music.

Peggy’s mind was on fire. She knew that Jim was someplace in
the lounge watching her dance with this man. Suddenly, she felt
his hand on the swell of her hip. Then it began to travel
downward and rest on her buttock; smoothing her flesh first and
then slightly squeezing it. She imagined Jim’s cock getting hard
at the sight. The music soon came to an end and they parted with
mutual thank yous.

The next soft song came on the radio, and she was approached
by another man. She accepted his offer to dance and walked with
him hand in hand. This man started out holding her at a distance.
She was sure that it was not because he didn’t want to touch her,
but rather because he wanted to get a good look at her lovely
breasts. He did not take his eyes off her bulging tits. “Do you
like the way my breasts look?” she asked the stranger.

Jim responded, “you have the most lovely tits I can recall
seeing. My name is Roger. What is your name?

“Peggy. If you like the way they look, you should feel them
against your chest,” she said as she pressed them into his large
frame. Again she began pressing her pussy mound into his leg. She
could feel the warmth develop between her legs as her hot nectar
began to flow. She felt his cock growing and resting against her
belly. She was so hot now, and she knew that she was putting on a
great show for Jim.

“Do you think that we might be able to find a place a little
quieter so we can get to know one another,” asked the man she was
dancing with.

“I don’t mean to disappoint you, Roger, but I am a working
girl. If you owned a candy story, it wouldn’t be good business to
give it away; now would it.”

“You mean you are a prostitute?” he asked incredulously.

“I hope I haven’t offended you, but that’s what I do for a
living. And I do it very well. I do it $500.00 well,” she said.

“I’m not usually given to paying for pussy, but I really
have to feel you next to me. I would love to employ you,” he said
with a wicked grin.

“Business first, Roger. Let me see the color of your money,
and we will make the necessary arrangements.

“Roger” showed Peggy his “money” and she smiled. “Follow me,
Roger. I think this is going to be a very interesting experience
for both of us,” she said with excitement, knowing that Jim would
be able to see every move that both of them made.

In what seemed like only moments they were in the bedroom
undressing one another. Peggy could feel her love nectar begin to
drip out of her hairy cunt lips and down her leg. Her nipples
seemed to be on fire. She longed to have a tongue lick them to
put out the fire. She could almost feel tight lips nibbling on
her large pink marbles. She saw Roger’s huge cock standing at at-
tention and needed to feel it in her mouth. Peggy laid down on
the bed and Roger approached the side of the bed pointing the
direction with his erect penis.

Roger moved on his knees, forward to Peggy’s head, his hard
thrusting cock standing stiffly from his belly, pointing at her
soft lips. Peggy rested her upper torso weight on one arm, lift-
ing the other, held his cock aiming it to her mouth, resting the
head on her pink tipped tongue.

Roger held her face tenderly between his open palms, lifting
her head slightly, centering his cock at her questing lips,
slowly slid his cock between her full lips deep into her mouth.
His cock drove deeper, and Peggy began to breathe through her
nose as his prick slid over her tongue. Her lips stretched wider
as his cock moved until his bulbous glans reached the back of her
throat, then with just a little more pressure, moved into the
narrow opening and lodged.

Peggy fought down the urge to gag, then swallowed, caressing
the head of his prick with the muscles of her throat. Quickly
learning to deep throat the throbbing prick in her mouth, Peggy
began swallowing and constricting her throat muscles around the
head of his deeply lodged prick.

Each time Roger withdrew his prick, Peggy would relax, then
as his cock delved deep into her throat, Peggy would swallow,
giving his cock intense pleasure.

As Roger turned over and laid on his back, Peggy settled be-
tween his open thighs. She leaned forward and took his cock be-
tween her lips, sucking at the knobby head and drawing the full
length of his prick into her warm wet mouth. Quickly, his prick
filled with blood, filling her oral cavity until she could no
longer hold it all inside her mouth and began to kiss the bulbous
head and run her flickering tongue around the tip. Holding the
pulsating head of his prick inside her sucking lips, she lapped
at his hard prick from balls to glans, and her hands were at his
balls, gently caressing and fondling.

Peggy pulled Roger’s prick from her hot lips, looking at it
closely, noting that the head of his cock was bright red and
swollen until it glistened both with her saliva and the pounding
blood filling his organ. She slipped her fingers down to feel his
balls again, and found them drawn up tight and hard. Knowing that
he was about to come, Peggy slipped her hot lipped mouth over the
head again, swirling her tongue over the glans, and driving the
tip of her tongue into the hole at the end.

Peggy suckled at his pounding, stiff prick, circling the
base of his root with her lightly clutching fingers as she felt
the surge of sperm expanding his cock. The sticky jelly spurted
and rolled from his cock. Peggy pulled her mouth away quickly and
aimed Roger’s spurting organ at her full titties, watching the
juice spatter and cling on her full trembling globes. As Roger’s
prick spent it’s last drop, Peggy rubbed the glistening jism into
the softness of her tits.

Trailing a wet stream of cum, Peggy put his cock back in her
mouth and sucked, compressing her lips around the shaft of his
prick, effectively milking it of any remaining drops of sticky
sperm, until it pulled free of her still sucking lips with an
audible noise.

Peggy left the room and returned shortly with wine for her
and a cocktail for Jim. Even after he had spent his cream, he
couldn’t take his eyes off of Peggy’s ass as it rolled when she
walked. As she set down his drink he watched her breasts sway.
They kissed deeply after they finished their drinks.

Peggy posed wonderfully on the bed next to “Roger.” What a
vision, he thought. He could feel his rod begin to lengthen once
again. Rolling over Roger found himself between Peggy’s legs. He
lifted one large tit to his mouth and began to suck gently on her
nipple. A moan escaped her full lips as his hands began to mas-
sage her breast meat. As Roger sucked harder on her tight
pinkish-red nipples, her moans increased. His tongue began to
trail down between her ample breasts to her soft belly as he
twirled her nipples between his forefingers and thumbs.

Peggy could feel his nose brush through her pubic hair in
his effort to avail himself of her fragrance. Electric shocks
poured through her as she reminder herself that Jim was watching
this man put his face into her womanhood. Roger’s hands had left
her breasts to fill themselves with her soft, round buttocks. She
placed her own hands on her titties, cupped them tenderly and
began teasing her big nipples.

The pink wet flesh glowed and glistened in the subdued
lighting and the shadowed darkness, and Roger placed his tongue,
pointed stiffly, into her clit at the top of her wet cunt, nuz-
zling at her wirey, sticky pubic hairs, and the hot slippery
opening.

Licking with his tongue, Roger attempted to savor all of the
rich sticky juices now pouring from Peggy’s pussy, moving his
head until he was able to touch the wet pulpy softness of the
pussy beneath his tongue. Roger darted forward, his tongue
slithering over Peggy’s curly hair and wet, open slit.

The sensation of Roger’s tongue on Peggy’s hot clit, brought
Peggy to orgasm with wild, fast movements. Her body arching from
the mattress as Roger’s tongue laved over her clit. As Peggy con-
vulsed she grabbed his head and held it tightly to her hole.
Roger’s sharp tongue drove deeply into her honey pit as he
squeezed her shaking buttocks.

Roger drew himself up and climbed toward Peggy as she lay
shaking slightly from her recent eruption. As she felt his hard
manhood approaching her still quivering pussy, she reached out
for him and came immediately to life. She wrapped her legs up-
wards around the small of his back, as she felt the head of his
great shaft approaching her steaming hole. She bucked her hairy
cunt upwards in a frenzy to receive his cock. Her full tits
quivering each time Roger’s prick drove into her cunt, her body
wriggling with pleasure at the deep hard thrusts.

She tossed her head backwards. Her hips were moving slightly
faster, her legs clinging a little tighter to Roger’s back. She
started moving her heels into Roger’s flanks, digging and spur-
ring him on like a horse. Her cunt twisting and convulsing over
Roger’s driving pole deep in her pussy as her tits flopped
wildly. Roger began to groan, then driving his cock to the hilt
against her ass, his balls tight between his legs. Peggy again
began to tighten and displayed an almost frightened look on her
face. This climax was earth shaking. Jolts of electricity ran
through her body from her tit to her clit. She began grunting
like a wild animal as she reached out, filled her hands with his
buttocks and pulled him yet deeper into her fuck hole.

Suddenly Roger rolled both of them over without removing his
raging penis. Peggy’s full tits were quivering and shaking as she
slowly slid down on Roger’s cock, burying his cock between the
curly haired lips of her dripping cunt until only his heavy,
hairy balls were visible. Roger’s hands held her full breasts,
his fingers caressing and fondling her pink swollen nipples as
his hips drove his cock slowly into the ravishing woman’s steam-
ing wet cunt; her ass working in wild swinging circles as she
drove her fat lipped pussy up and down the slippery hot cock.
Twice Roger had to stop her motion to keep from coming prema-
turely.

He tapped her on her lovely pink ass as if to give her
direction. Gently he pushed her off of his towering cock and
asked her if he could have another drink. She consented and made
another journey for refreshments, swinging her hot bottom for the
benefit of his hungry eyes. Soon she returned displaying the
drinks and her lovely breasts. She felt so sexy and knew that
Roger and Jim would both come like a lion.

Moments after completing his drink Roger regained his com-
posure and drew Peggy to him. A deep kiss precipitated him
saying, “get on your knees, honey. I’m going to drive this cock
bone all the way home.”

She got on her knees and exhibited her lovely buttocks to
his gaze and touch. Roger placed the head of his spear between
the hairy cunt lips and sunk it deeply into her body. Slowly at
first his raging dick drove into her hole. The motion soon grew
quicker, her curvaceous ass becoming a blur as she screwed his
hard cock. Roger withdrew and pulled his prick upwards over her
wet-lipped opening, then drove it into her cunt from behind the
kneeling lusty lady again. His cock sank deeply into her crotch
until his belly was pressed against her curvaceous ass, his balls
dangling between her richly curved trembling thighs. Peggy began
to move with his rhythm, her ass moving back as his prick sank
into her hairy cunt, quickly establishing a rhythm of lusty need.
Peggy continued moving to Roger’s rhythm as she felt herself near
another climax. She knew that Jim was watching and must have his
hand on his own fuck tool.

Roger’s throbbing prick jetted, squirting his male cream in
between the her clinging thighs, filling her cavity with the
slippery male juice of his sex. A copious quantity of juicy hot
cum escaped the tight lipped opening to trail down Peggy’s cur-
vaceous thigh, gleaming silver in the subdued lighting of the
bedroom, clinging to her richly curved leg.

The feeling of hot sperm filling her wet pussy, brought
Peggy the rest of the way to a shuddering orgasm, her body insa-
tiable, moving as a blur now bucking her ass back onto Roger’s
spurting prick, driving his hard squirting male organ so deeply
that his balls were squeezed tightly between her thighs. Peggy
could feel Roger’s cock diminishing in size within her still con-
vulsing cunt, attempting to hold his cock between the slippery
hot lips of her cunt as long as possible. As his cock shrunk, it
pulled free by itself, trailing sperm while slippery pussy
lubricant slid down Peggy’s inner thigh, dripping from the
ringlets of her soft curly pussy hair; the oily liquid matting
the curls of her pubic hair, the swollen lipped opening oozing
the hot wet combined juices of Peggy’s sexual passion dripping
from the opening between her thighs. Her finger trailed down to
slip between the hairy opening, gathering up a finger tip of
slippery juice, transferring the lubricant to her mouth. Peggy’s
pink tongue darted out, capturing the silver liquid, savoring the
salty taste, as she licked her finger clean.

Jim lay there, playing the part of Roger, spent but fully
gratified. Peggy was the hottest and most exciting woman in the
world. Peggy snuggled up to him and purred like a kitten, press-
ing her heavy, pink tits into the side of his chest. Gently, he
shook her, looked into her eyes and snapped his fingers once.
Peggy closed her eyes briefly, then reopened them. “Did you enjoy
that Peggy?” Jim asked lovingly.

“I can’t remember ever being that hot Jim. Promise we will
do it again soon,” she begged.

Jim assured her that they would enjoy many similar experi-
ments soon. “Now tell me everything that happened with this Roger
character.” Peggy did just that. They fucked twice more that
night and slept like babies. Peggy loved playing the part of a
hooker. Next time maybe it would be Jim’s turn.

CHAPTER TEN – HYPNOSEX

Pam and Art enjoyed an existence very much like most other
couples in Huntington Beach. Having moved around the globe as an
army brat, Art had the occasion to see much of the world and
California provided much of what he found to be comfortable. With
a relatively good job, Art was satisfied with his professional
development. His one concern seemed to be a fixation that he
shared with millions of other men in their late thirties; he
couldn’t seem to get enough sex.

It wasn’t as if Pam and Art didn’t enjoy their sex life; he
just couldn’t get his dick wet often enough. At times he ques-
tioned himself as to his libido. Was he over sexed, or did he
just want to live a complete life? He knew that life was way too
short and that he should take advantage of what was available,
while it was available.

Pam shared a position with the majority of women in contem-
porary society. She wasn’t quite sure if she had ever really ex-
perienced an orgasm. She enjoyed sex, however she couldn’t recall
ever having an earth shaking, eye-rolling, toe-tingling climax.
Art was driven, via love, to make every effort to provide his
gorgeous, 5″3″, 115 pound, blond princess with the orgasm that
she wanted and deserved.

She did turn heads wherever she went. Her beautiful frame
offered measurements of 36D-24-36. Her heavy, magnetic breasts
were accented by a small waist and saucy buttocks that made most
men mad with envy. Now and then she would break fear’s icy grip
and do something sexy and completely out of the ordinary. Art was
always turned on when this would occur. She talked about other
men gawking at her and fantasies like participating in a wet tee
shirt contest. The thought of other men being aroused by Pam was
exciting for Art.

Being somewhat of a computer wiz, Art subscribed to computer
several bulletin board services. One day while on line he
downloaded several stories about hypnosis in the bedroom on an
x-rated board. The concept interested Art, and his interest con-
tinued to grow. He left a message for the author of the stories,
and low and behold the author returned his message.

The author’s name was Jim, and he indicated that hypnosis
could indeed be used to improve one’s sex life. Jim had often
used, what he referred to as, hypnosex to give his wife
heightened sensibilities. She was able to climax on demand, make
love with any lover she chose and completely satisfy her desires
while increasing her sexual awareness.

Imagine what could be accomplished, Art thought. Pam could
learn how to bring herself to orgasm whenever she chose. He
talked with her about this new approached and she indicated that
she had tried hypnosis when she was a young girl, and it didn’t
work. After sharing this with Jim, it was explained to Art that
we are often hypnotized and don’t even know it. Because we have
such erroneous ideas of hypnosis, we could easily be hypnotized
and not be aware of it.

Jim suggested that Art read the induction techniques that
Jim had given and begin by trying some relaxation exercises with
Pam. It surely couldn’t hurt anything, but Jim cautioned Art not
to attempt to do anything that Pam would find offensive or dras-
tically contrary to her values.

Art began by demonstrating how comfortable one could become
by making their body completely relaxed. Pam began to enjoy the
short sessions of relaxation. He eventually moved the sessions to
the bath, where Pam could get in a hot tub of water and lose her-
self in the warmth and increased weightlessness. This excited the
hell out of Art, because he could sit by casually and look at his
wife’s lovely body as she closed her eyes and his voice spoke of
lovely beach scenes; the white sand under her torso, the waves
lapping at her exposed breasts, the sun gently warming her
relaxed body, the birds filling the air with song. He took his
time with her development in an effort to teach relaxation and
increase her interest.

In several weeks Art contacted Jim and indicated that
progress was being made, but he wanted to intensify the relaxa-
tion. Jim suggested that he may now being moving the sessions to
the bedroom and introduce sensual massage as an element in the
hypnosis effort.

At the next session Art suggested to Pam that she could be-
come even more relaxed. He told her that after the bath he would
teach her another technique. When her bath was complete, Art
carefully helped Pam dry off and escorted her to their bed. Pre-
viously, he had prepared everything that would be needed and
placed the items next to the bed: a towel, a bottle of body lo-
tion and a hand-held electric massager.

He suggested that she should imagine being on her favorite
beach and that there would be no one within miles. She was taking
advantage of the solitude and should feel comfortable to bask in
the sun free from the restrictions of clothing. It was just the
two of them. He asked her if she could feel the texture of the
sand under her body as she rested on her belly; could she feel
the warmth of the sun on her back, legs and buttocks. Art then
began to ever-so-gently run his fingers down her back and stopped
just above her buttocks at the small of the back. He touched her
neck at the hair line and lightly ran his fingers up to and be-
hind her ears. He could see her shiver slightly at his quiet ad-
vances. He then went completely to the opposite end of this
lovely body, just above the ankles and ran the back of his finger
tips up her calves to the back of her knees. He stopped momen-
tarily and continued the path up the back of her thighs and
stopped where the cheeks of her lovely ass met her thighs.

His cock was raging at this point. It was as big as he had
ever remembered it being, and he could feel the semen leaking
from its head, wetting his underwear. Out of the shear fire
developing in his loins, he reached down and touched his stiff
rod and stroked it lightly with one hand as his other continued a
path up Pam’s sides to the swell of the sides of her breasts
resting on the sheets. He asked her if her breasts felt good
resting on the warm sand and if she could feel her nipples becom-
ing hard as they sought new depths.

Art then turned Pam over and gently brushed the “sand” from
her breasts, belly and thighs. He continued his efforts on the
front of her willing body. After teasing her senses with his
feather touch, her told her that he would be applying body lo-
tion. Placing an ample amount of lotion in his hands to warm it,
Art was soon applying the oily mixture to his lovely wife.
Throughout the ensuing moments, Art continued to give Pam sug-
gestions about becoming more and more relaxed; her body was feel-
ing heavier and heavier; becoming part of the earth; that she was
so relaxed she didn’t want to move. He told her that she had
never felt so relaxed and that she wanted to fall into a deep
sleep; that’s OK just let yourself go and enjoy the warmth of the
sun on your body.

As the lotion was urged into every pore of her body she was
told to let her mind wander to any place that she chose. She
could be anywhere in the world with whomever she wanted to be
with. He suggested that she keep her eyes closed and imagine that
she was being given a massage by anyone that she chose. Art con-
tinued to massage his lovely wife’s body as his cock strained for
release. His hands began to become more aggressive and would oc-
casionally linger on her ripe nipples and inner thighs. Soon Pam
opened her legs to admit his advancing fingers. He could see her
love juices begin to drip from her swollen pussy lips. He gently
turned her over and began to knead the meat of her buttocks,
thighs and back. Again she opened her thighs as a message to dip
into her hot love cavern. Not wanting to take this session too
far, Art began to prepare her for being fully awake. He told her
that she was beginning to become fully awake; that her body was
becoming lighter and lighter and that she would begin to count to
ten. When she reached ten she would be fully awake and feel won-
derful.

Pam did as she was bid and told Art that they would be much
more comfortable if he would take his things off and come to bed.
The kids were in bed and there was nothing stopping them from
relaxing together the rest of the night. It didn’t take much en-
couragement for his love rod to come to full attention. He rolled
into Pam’s arms, his chest rested on Pam’s soft, warm breasts,
and his raging cock soon found her oily, gaping tunnel to spill
his seed into. This time everything was different. She threw her
legs back in an effort to bring him as deeply inside of her as he
could be. She actually shuddered this time as he filled his
strong hands with the cheeks of her ass, and his cock continued
to pummel her moist, hairy hole.

Art’s elation was doubled when he received a message from
Jim indicating that Jim and Peggy would soon be planning a cruise
to the Caribbean and invited Art and Pam to meet with them on the
cruise. It would be on Norwegian Cruise Lines; the Seaward. The
course of travel would be one evening at sea, one day on the
cruise line’s private island, on the Ocho Rios in Jamaica,
another day at sea with a stop in the Caymen Islands, a half day
in Cozumel and return. The thought of a cruise had always excited
Art. What excitement would they find in this new adventure?

You only go around once, Art mused. What the hell! Pam was
amenable to the idea. It would be great to be away from the
everyday toils and the kids for a while. It was all set. The date
would be in February and arrangements had been made. Anticipation
was beginning to drive Art wild. He continued his experimentation
with Pam’s relaxation techniques and began to introduce himself
to a series of fantasies. The holidays came and went, building a
natural anticipation in the two couples.

The Miami Harbor was bustling with activity. Art and Pam
couldn’t get over the size of the ship. Baggage check was con-
ducted without incident, and they walked up the half mile long
winding ramp which led to the entry way. Their eyes traveled from
one couple to another wondering if they would see Peggy and Jim
among the couples entering the ship. The excitement continued to
increase as their eyes fell upon any number of beautiful looking
couples, men and women.

After settling in their cabin, they removed to the top of
the pool deck for departure. The ship’s engines began their slow
but steady pull away from the dock as well-wishers moved about
like ants ten stories below the couple’s vantage point. Once the
ship was clear of the harbor, Pam and Art ordered a drink from
Captain Billy’s Bar and reclined on the lounge chairs on the main
pool deck. Already bodies began to rid themselves of clothing to
enjoy the 75 degree warmth of the sun deck.

Art could feel his manhood start its upward climb to erec-
tion as one lovely woman after another pranced by his perch. One
in particular seemed to provide interest as he looked out over
the deck behind his dark glasses. Each step her rolling buttocks
seemed to provide invitation as the sway of her tantalizing
breasts lightly covered by a thin clinging tee shirt hypnotized
him and fed his erection. She continued to skip about the deck
with every intention of attracting the gaze of every man on
board.

He knew that she could feel eyes on her as she went to the
bar and returned with a drink. Suddenly she returned to the bar
to retrieve a cocktail napkin and provided another view of her
exciting body. Her gathered suit bottom was scant and hugged the
rolling curves of her tight fanny from the swaying cheeks of her
ass to the deep crack which provided the division between these
smooth globes. Art’s eyes traced her pubic arch and perceived
tight golden curls of hair furtively peaking from beneath the
cloth designed to contain them. Traveling upward he saw each
heavy breast rise and fall with the motion of her shoulders. She
knew he was watching every move and exaggerated each to enhance
his interest. Art was hoping that this would be Peggy, but where
could Jim be.

Pam couldn’t help but to notice Art’s interest. Oddly enough
she didn’t feel jealous. It was kind of exciting to see Art’s
focus and the resulting bulge develop in his shorts. She knew
that soon she would feel that thick bone driving inside of her
slippery love tunnel. Her own interest began to develop as many
of the ship’s men began to move about the deck. Thin men, fat
men, muscular men, tall men, short, suave, fast talkers, relaxed
attitudes and mysterious men all provided a circus of observa-
tion. There were several that she seemed attracted to. She knew
that she could turn on most of the men on the ship and was bound
and determined to do just that.

Shortly thereafter as Pam was sipping an iced pina colada,
she noticed a man that she had not previously seen on deck. She
almost laughed to herself when she began to ponder the humor of
invariably seeing several people while on vacation that bore a
strong resemblance to folks that she knew back come. This nice
looking men was the spitting image of Larry, her next door neigh-
bor. She had always fantasized about having an affair with Larry
but was hesitant because he lived so close to her. This guy’s
fanny was even cuter than Larrys, she smiled as she thought. She
could feel the warmth develop in her loins as the thin material
of her panties massaged her soft pussy each time she squeezed her
thighs together. She was becoming wet thinking about a nice thick
penis resting above a pair of heavy, hairy balls.

When Pam and Art returned to the room to get ready for an
early dinner, there was a flashing light on the phone indicating
that there was a message at the desk. Art’s heart jumped slightly
knowing that it may be a message from Peggy and Jim. His hopes
were justified as the young English girl told him that Jim had
called and asked her to relate that they were in cabin 4010 and
would like Art to call when he returned. He no sooner hung up the
phone when he began dialing cabin 4010. Peggy answered the phone,
and her voice provided further excitement. “Hello. This is Art. I
presume that I’m talking to Peggy. How are you?” he said with a
slight quiver in his voice.

“Fine, thank you. I’ve heard so much about you. Jim tells me
that this is your first cruise. I’m convinced that you will love
it. Please let me know if there is anything I can do to make it
more comfortable. Tell Pam that I said Hi, and I’m anxious to
meet her. Would you like to talk to Jim?” Peggy’s upbeat voice
rang out the question.

Jim and Art agreed to meet on the lower pool deck for
drinks, an informal dinner and conversation. Art told Jim that he
could recognize them because Pam would be wearing a blue and
white striped halter top outfit with white shorts.

His eyes couldn’t help but to wander as Jim got off the
elevator on the lower pool deck. His anxiety increased while
looking for Art and Pam. He was also very proud of how great
Peggy looked in her revealing swim suit and open cover-up. She
wore a black and white perrot doll, two-piece suit that accen-
tuated her heavy, milk-white breasts on the top. The bottoms
separated and hugged her firm, solid buttocks as they rose and
fell with each step. Jim could feel himself becoming hard as he
watcher her tease the audience on the lower deck. Just a hint of
reddish pubic hair peaked from the vee of her suit bottom.

They approached the Tiki bar and were greeted by a rather
pleasant English bar tender. “What will be your pleasure,
friends?” asked Bill the bar tender.

Jim looked inquiringly at Peggy, shrugged and suggested to
no one in particular, “two pena coladas, Peg?” She nodded her
agreement and Bill began the mixology ritual. Jim’s eyes con-
tinued to scan the participants, and his eyes fell on one of the
loveliest creatures in his memory. She was so lovely, he didn’t
even notice that she was wearing a blue striped halter top and
white shorts. As it dawned on him that the couple approaching
were likely Art and Pam, he wanted to check his breath and locate
his Pulitzer Prize so that he could impress them. He was, in
short, pleased that the couple that they were soon to meet were
as attractive as they obviously were.

Pam and Art seemed somewhat shy as they approached. Jim
noticed their apparent discomfort and tried his best to lighten
the moment. Jim took the initiative to break the ice by making
the introductions, ordering drinks and offering both jokes and
small talk. Soon, as is often the case, the ladies generated
their own conversation about the children, awful teachers,
P.T.A., and wardrobes. Jim and Art took a walk to the sporting
deck to observe the skeet shooting exercises.

“How much have you really benefited through the use of hyp-
nosis, Peggy?” asked Pam as they settled onto deck chairs
situated at pool side.

Peggy became excited as she shared her successes with Pam.
As they started on their second Pina Colada and Margarita, Peggy
spoke to her of progress in weight control, assertiveness and im-
proved sex life. “Not only I am in control of my destiny, each
day is filled with excitement and growth,” Peggy told Pam.

“What do you mean by ‘excitement and growth?’” Pam inquired
of Peggy.

Peggy went on to explain how her sexual life had been im-
proved by the added variety that hypnosex could offer. She didn’t
used to think as much of herself. She didn’t really know what may
have happened in her childhood to give her an inferiority com-
plex, but until Jim showed her what potential she had, she found
sex unexciting and was somewhat introverted. Now she found other
men attractive, became excited when she knew she could excite
others and was able to develop new relationships that helped her
in her professional development as well as her personal growth.

Pam was somewhat incredulous, “doesn’t Jim get jealous when
he thinks about you involved with other men?”

“Quite the contrary. He encourages it. He knows I love him,
and I think he likes to show me off. There was a time when I
would have worn a bathing suit only if I had to in order to go
into the swimming pool. Now I like to wear as little as possible
so I can excite other men as well as Jim. It’s put the excitement
back into our marriage and multiplied it a hundred-fold. In my
mind, I can fuck anyone I want to. I have had Kevin Cosner suck
my breasts… not just imagination… he has actually laid on top
of me and put my tits in his hot mouth. Sean Connery has been
kind enough to give me a full body massage with his strong hands
on my hot flesh. It continues to get better, and I can be with
anyone I want to. I usually like to finish up with Jim. He will
always be the best, especially after becoming as excited as the
fantasy makes him. Sometimes you should try it. I don’t think you
would be sorry. As an example, look out at this sea of human man
flesh around the pool,” Peggy suggested. “Don’t any of them ap-
peal to you?”

Pam’s eyes began to scan the men around the pool. “There are
a few men that are wonderfully built,” she said.

“Well, imagine how they would look without their suits. Im-
agine how it would feel to have their hands on your beautiful
breasts, their lips sucking on your nipples, their hands holding
your tight buttocks. Doesn’t that make you feel a tingle between
your legs?” Peggy asked.

Pam started to feel just that tingle that Peggy was eluding
to. “Now that you mention it, I have had fantasies about making
it with other men. I just seem to fight the urge because of how I
was brought up. We were always taught that it was wrong. I do
find that guy over there with the red suit on exciting,” Pam con-
fided to Peggy.

“Take a good look, memorize each muscle and bulge, close
your eyes and imagine laying with your legs open, and he is rub-
bing the head of his hard rod against the lips of your vagina. He
is gathering your nectar on the head of his cock so he can slide
it inside of your body,” Peggy urged.

Pam’s eyes closed and her mind began to wander. She could
feel her nipples harden, and as she moved her legs slightly back
and forth, she could feel the moisture begin to flow between her
legs. With each moment that went by, she continued to squeeze her
buttocks together to increase the sensation. “Oh christ!” she
said through pursed lips. “If I keep thinking about him, I know I
will have a climax right here. We had better change the subject
for a while.”

Peggy’s smile was broadening as she watched Pam’s subtle
display of sexuality. “OK, on a slightly different note… How
would you like to do some exploring on Pleasure Island when we
get there? The four of us can mix up a batch of drinks and go on
a hike up the little river. They have a great little water falls
about three miles from the beach. The road is within a half mile
and I’m told that nobody likes to hike that last half mile. We
should have the water falls to ourselves,” Peggy hinted.

Pam seemed interested as she told Peggy, “I think the guys
will get a kick out of it. Let’s be adventurous.

Meanwhile on the sporting deck, Jim and Art were discussing
their limited interest in guns and shooting sports. More often
than not they discussed a series of lovely young lady joggers
that continued to jaunt by. “I’m just glad to be away from com-
puters and business for a while, Jim. I think that Pam and I
needed to get away from the kids and home for awhile. I don’t
really care what we do, if anything, while away. I just want to
relax, have a few drinks and fuck like a dog,” Art pronounced.

“You and me, both, Art. The atmosphere of the cruise and the
islands brings out the libido in me. Incidentally, I don’t want
to offend, but Pam is one of the hottest women I’ve ever seen.
She could give the pope a stiff,” Jim offered kiddingly.

Art smirked and said, “Oh that’s OK, Jim. I would feel bad
if you thought she had to sneak up on a glass of water to get a
drink. I think she’s beautiful, and I appreciate it when others
think that she is exciting. Same goes for me. Peggy has a great
set of tits. My only dilemma is whether I like her tits or her
great ass better. I wouldn’t mind seeing those puppies of hers
without the suit.

“Who knows. You just may have the opportunity to do that.
She claims that she is going to broaden her horizons on this
vacation and get a little real sun. We’ve done a few hypnotic
fantasies about sun bathing before we left home. It turned her on
so much, one night she had eight climaxes just laying out in the
sun and playing with her pussy. If the moment is right, I’ll give
her some suggestions that prompt her to explore her sensuality,”
Jim said with raised eyebrows.

“I can feel myself getting hard at the thought of it, Jim.
What do you say we get back to the pool, get the girls and some-
thing to eat?” Art suggested.

Their dinner was a pleasant experience. Too many varieties
and a little too much to eat. After a short rest in their respec-
tive rooms and a change of clothes, the two couples returned to
the pool deck to avail themselves of the fun calypso beat offered
by a native band. Jim was very enamored by Pam based on the heavy
state of his rod, yet still got excited as he saw many of the
eyes on board turned toward Peggy as she exhibited her flesh
while frolicking on the deck. The four adventurers swam together,
rolled around in one of the hot tubs and generally had a warm,
enjoyable time that evening. As the stars bid that day good bye,
each of the couples retired to their beds to investigate the
pleasures of an increasing sensuality.

“Art and Pam are really nice people, honey. Don’t you think
so?” Jim asked of Peggy as she shed her cover-up and swim suit.

Peggy smiled demurely and said without expecting an im-
mediate response, “you would like to see his cock in my mouth,
wouldn’t you, Jim? I saw how your bone came to attention when he
was watching me walk around the deck. I got terribly excited when
he brushed up against me in the hot tub. I felt his hard rod. I
think he is hung well, Jim. I think I would like to feel his cock
in me oily hole, honey. Imagine that! If her were touching my
naked buttocks and kissing my neck. That turns you on, doesn’t
it, baby? You weren’t able to hide your interest in Pam either.
Her breasts are very lovely. I’d like to see them in your mouth
as Art pumps his stiff bone in me.” They continued to talk one
another into a frenzy. Jim induced hypnosis on Peggy and gave her
a sensual massage by Art. Their evening ended by Jim bringing her
back to reality and fucking her mouth and hairy pussy three
times. Sleep followed with saucy dreams and exciting hopes for a
new day in a new port.

Pleasure Island, as it was called, was a private island
owned by the cruise line. It was little more than three miles by
seven miles with three small lakes, a river and miles of beaches.
As Jim stumbled out of bed, showered, brushed his teeth and
dressed, he heard the ship’s announcer on the intercom. “We are
nearing the coast of Pleasure Island. The first shuttle will
leave in one hour.”

“I’ll see you on the top deck, honey. I’ll have coffee and
breakfast waiting,” Jim offered to Peggy as he was leaving the
state room. “Get your sweet ass out of the rack and get moving.
There’s a wonderful new world out there to see.”

The cool and salty morning air brushed Jim’s cleanly shaven
face as the elevator door opened on the top deck. His eyes were
bathed with the sight of land through the mist of the morning.
The sun was already burning off the fog and the day promised
little humidity and lots of sunshine. The crew was bustling about
cleaning the decks and placing deck chairs around the pool. Other
adventurers were creating small traffic patterns as they acquired
their coffee and breakfast. Jim located a table with a great view
of the approaching island, deposited his towel and bag and got
into line for the morning’s goodies.

“Hello, Jim. Did you sleep well?” Pam inquired as she ap-
proached Jim’s table.

“Like a baby. I think I could get used to a steady diet of
this. Damn, you look great today. Please join me. Peggy will be
here shortly. I hope you won’t be offended when I tell you this,
but Peggy found Art very exciting. In fact, he was the subject of
her fantasy last night,” Jim revealed as his eyes traced each
move that Pam made in her approach to the table.

Pam blushed slightly, “he is an attractive man, and she
would be blind not to notice. However, she isn’t doing badly for
herself either. Did anyone ever tell you that you resemble Har-
rison Ford? I find him exciting and have seen almost everything
he had done from Star Wars to his most recent.”

Jim had been told that on several occasions, but really
couldn’t see the resemblance much himself. “My kids have always
told me that. If you think he’s nice looking, I’ll take that as a
compliment. If anyone as lovely as you considers me attractive, I
guess I can die now and not pass go, collect two hundred dollars,
and do directly to heaven,” Jim said kiddingly as they both
chuckled.

Peggy came ambling by and was soon followed by Art. “You’re
out of my sight for a half hour and already your cheating on me
with Pam. Well, if you must cheat, it may as well be with the
loveliest guest on board,” Peggy teased as she sat down. The two
couples had a leisurely breakfast and made plans to adventure
onto the island in an hour.

Getting to the water falls was not as difficult as they had
thought. There were five taxi stands on the only road on the is-
land. The driver told them that the blue taxi sign was the one
closest to the water falls, and a taxi came by every half hour or
so. The ride to the blue taxi stop was interesting because they
were all crammed into the back seat, and Peggy and Pam had to sit
rather close to the two men. As they emerged from the taxi, the
sun fell full on the faces of the two couples. They had packed a
light lunch and brought two thermos jugs full of pirate drinks.
After a short journey prompted by the directions of the driver,
they could soon hear the subtle song of the falls.

Other than the swaying buttocks of the two lovely women that
walked in front of the two men, Jim thought that this was likely
one of the most beautiful sights he had ever seen when he ap-
proached the falls. Crystal clear water cascaded over the rock
formation and cut a path through a green garden. The girls
quickly placed a blanket on the ground and lost their outer wrap-
pings. Peggy’s body was taunt as it stretched out in a run for
the water. Each muscle and curve was accented by the sun with
each move. Pam was a little more hesitant as she approached the
water. “Do you think that there is anything alive in the water?”
she asked as her foot reached the shore of the small lake.

“Not just yet, honey. Soon there will be some major snakes
pop out if you look any better than you do right now,” Art said
with a smile. Soon both girls were frolicking in the water. Jim
and Art settled down with a drink on towels brought along for
that purpose.

The men soon dozed off, lulled by the sound of the water-
fall. Jim couldn’t believe his eyes when he opened them. Pam and
Peggy had removed their suits and were climbing the path beside
the falls. He looked to see if Art was aware and noticed that Art
was already paying close attention as he stroked his cock through
his suit. “Holy christ! Why didn’t you wake me?” Jim chastised
Art.

“You haven’t missed much, Jim. They just took their things
off, and I think they believe that we are snoozing. Damn, your
wife has great tits. I love the way they sway when she thinks she
is about to fall. Her ass is so smooth and well shaped,” Art an-
nounced almost as if to himself.

Jim felt his cock stiffen as Art spoke of Peggy’s body. Pam
was indeed beautiful, he thought. She could compete with any
young girl in a glamour magazine. Playboy, look out! As Jim
watched Pam and Peggy helping one another up the side of the
falls, he slipped his cock from the side of his suit and began to
stroke it. Art couldn’t help but notice what he was doing and
soon followed his lead. “Are you looking at my wife or yours,
Jim?” Art asked without taking his eyes off the girls.

“Does it matter?” Jim asked as he continued to lightly run
his hand up and down his blood engorged fuck tube. “I haven’t had
a raging hard-on like this in five years. Your wife is gorgeous,
and Peggy has never looked so good with her tits glistening as
they are and her ass wiggling. Wouldn’t you love to have your
bone in one of them right now?”

“It’s OK with me if it’s OK with you. I have had fantasies
about fucking Peggy ever since I first saw her. Now that I’m
looking right up Peggy’s ass, do you have any reservations about
her making it with another man?” Art asked.

Jim looked at him with a serious look in his eyes and said,
“the thought of you fucking Peggy does nothing but excite the
hell out of me. It’ll be her call. If she wants some strange
cock, it may as well be yours. Go for it.”

The two men continued to pull on their enlarged cocks until
the girls began to return from the falls. As they approached,
they could see that the men were no longer asleep and attempted
to cover themselves with the clothes they carried. “I hope you’re
not angry that we tried to get a little closer to nature, Art. It
was wonderful. You should try it,” Pam said as she traded her
partially wet clothing for a towel to hide behind.

Art jumped up off the towel, smiled, dropped his suit and
said, “doesn’t bother me a bit, Pam.” He began to head toward the
water, and Peggy’s eyes riveted on his heavy cock as it bounced
off his well-tanned leg. “Last one in’s a piker.”

Pam threw caution to the wind and followed Art into the
water. Jim’s excitement increased as he saw Pam’s buttocks roll
with the rhythm of her unabashed dance to the water. Jim stood
up, looked at Peggy as he raised his eyebrows and asked, “shall
we?”

Peggy dropped her clothes, put her hands on her waist,
cocked her hips to one side and wiggled her hefty breasts at Jim.
“Let’s get in the water before I lose my courage,” she giggled.
He removed his suit, walked over, grabbed her hand and they ap-
proached the water as their eyes sought the flesh of their new
friends. Jim’s cock began its upward journey to mild erection as
they entered the water.

Art had already lifted Pam into his arms in the water in an
effort to show off her lovely assets. Pam’s breasts were bobbing
in the cool water and her hardy nipples stood out as little
marbles on the globes of her substantial, yet firm breasts. As
Jim and Peggy came closer, Art lifted Pam’s smooth buttocks out
of the water and seemed to point them at the other couple. Jim’s
hand closed more tightly on Peggy’s hand as his eyes met the wet
hair that graced Pam’s pouting pussy slit. He could feel his cock
begin to throb while he viewed the ball-like flesh of Pam’s ass
cheeks. Suddenly, Peggy’s hand was on his raging penis and began
to stoke its full length under the water. “I haven’t felt you
this hard in a long time, honey,” she commented as she turned to
rub the nipples of her soft tits against his strong arm.

Jim swung Peggy through the air in a swirl in an effort to
lift her slightly out of the cool water to place her buttocks and
breasts before the inquiring eyes of the other couple. Jim was
proud of Peggy’s body and became even more excited as the other
couple’s eyes became glued to her flesh. Peggy never dropped a
stroke on Jim’s erection. Her hand glided easily over the skin of
his fuck tool aided by the water, yet it seemed to stick peri-
odically. Jim’s balls were being pulled by his stretching erec-
tion as he filled his hands with Peggy’s firm buttocks and
covered her mouth with his. Peggy placed his hard rod between her
legs and tightened them like a vice while she filled her hands
with his hairy ass and hid her tongue in his sucking mouth.

Pam’s excitement continued to sky rocket as she reviewed the
display of the other couple. She reached up, cupped her lovely
left breast and began to pinch its rock-hard nipple. Her eyes
rolled up in her head as Art’s hand found the deep crack of her
ass cheeks, allowed it to caress its length and dip into her
hairy, swollen love tunnel. He inserted two fingers into her
honey pot and lowered his head to tweak her nipple with hardened
lips. He then fully sucked her nipple into his softening mouth
and continued to suck while his hand assault continued on her
flooded pussy.

The lips of Peggy’s deep love hole were opening like a
flower as her excitement increased. She soon felt Jim’s hands
glide over her clenching ass cheeks, lift her by her buttocks,
spread the lips of her oily pussy and insert the head of his
thick fuck bone. They felt some resistance to his entry due to
the washing action of the water, but as the head of his penis be-
came covered with her love fluids, his cock made progress into
her depths. She had never fucked in the water with another
couple, and it didn’t take long for her to begin her first mind-
blowing climax. “Oh fuck! Blow your hot cream in my hole, honey.
Fuck it up in there and cover my fucking guts with your boiling
cock juice,” she raged as Jim’s pulled her ass toward his as-
saulting cock bone.

Pam and Art stopped briefly to watch Peggy enjoying her or-
gasm. Peggy’s full breasts were flopping up out of the water and
pounding on Jim’s hairy chest with each thrust of his pole into
her oily slot. Art glided through the water attempting to get
closer to the wildly fucking couple. He wanted to get as close as
possible in an effort see their bodies locking in their lusty
embrace. As his legs cut through the water in his short journey,
one hand remained on Pam’s large breasts and the other hand con-
tinued its assault on her deep, hot slit. Soon they were standing
next to the wildly fucking couple. Art turned Pam so that his
cock bone rested in the deep crack of her tight ass. His hand
guided his hot rod down the division between her fanny globes and
placed the head of his cock at the entrance to her slippery
pussy. She spread her long legs in welcome to his hard cock and
felt Art’s trembling hand slipping quickly over the hard nipples
of her floating mammary glands.

Suddenly, Peggy reached out, in her last moment of passion,
grabbed Art’s hand and crushed it to her breast. Jim, Art and Pam
had a look of disbelief on their faces as their eyes were riveted
to Art’s fingers, filled with Peggy’s tit flesh. She continued to
spasm with Jim’s cock embedded in her hairy love tunnel. Jim was
crazed by the initiative that Peggy had taken and fell into the
arms of lust. Pam bent back to offer her gaping pussy to Art’s
prodding penis. She then reached down to feel Jim’s bone pulsing
as it spent his load into Peggy. Jim’s cock began its long jour-
ney to the depths of Pam’s quim.

Spent as they were, Peggy and Jim parted, moved back and
began to watch Art drive his bone into his wife. They could see
Art treating himself to Pam’s swinging globes and the rock-hard
nipples that adorned them. The look on Pam’s face was that of a
hungry lioness, and she began to grunt with each thrust of Art’s
cock. “Fuck it in there, baby. Stick your long pole in my hot
pussy just like Jim did to Peggy. Spill your cock lava into my
pit,” Pam shouted through clenched teeth.

Art pulled his bouncing cock from Pam’s gaping pussy and
turned her around. She jumped in the water throwing her legs wide
and grabbed Art under his strong arms. Art re-inserted his bold
sword into her waiting hole and began pumping her again. Jim
whispered something to Peggy and moved in behind Pam. He reached
around Pam and cradled her breasts with his hands allowing her
ripe nipples to fall between his thumbs and forefingers. Pam
released her grip on Art and fell back into Jim’s arms while
holding fast to Art’s hips with her legs. Pam was suspended be-
tween the two men. Art was driving his meat into her womanhood
and Jim was manipulated her fleshy breasts.

Peggy moved behind Jim and reached for his swollen, hairy
balls as she began to tenderly bite on the muscles of his back.
The attached couple were now fucking with a frenzy, their excite-
ment enhanced by the ministrations of their new friends. Pam’s
eyes were wild. “Jim has got my tits in his hands, Art. Another
man is playing with my hard nipples. Does that drive you wild,
mother fucker?” she asked as she panted.

“I love the sight of his fingers on your nipples. Peggy is
playing with my fuck nuts. Can you feel her hand down there? My
balls are so tight I think they are going to explode,” Art
grunted. Peggy allowed her hand to continue its path beyond Art’s
balls to his penetrating cock. She could feel his straining penis
enter Pam. She felt the slick, hair-covered pussy open to admit
Arts pounding cock as she pressed her soft, heavy tits into Art’s
back.

“Jim has got his cock rubbing against my back, Art. I can
feel his bone on my buns, honey. It feels so good against my ass
as you’re driving your cock into me,” Pam jerked out the words.

“How would you like to feel his cock in you, Pam? Can you
feel his bone spreading the lips of your hairy pussy as it spears
you? Can you feel his cum pumping into your belly? Can you feel
his hands on the cheeks of your ass, his lips on your nipples,
his tongue in your cunt?” Art went on to heighten her excitement.
Pam soon began to convulse uncontrollably as she climaxed on Art
spurting cock bone.

The two couples separated. Art took Pam into his arms and
gently held her as a helpless baby. Jim and Peggy fell into one
another’s arms, smiled at each other and headed for the beach and
their towels. As soon as Art and Pam regained their composure,
they too returned to dry land. Each of the four friends were
dealing with the interaction in their own way. Little was said as
each felt somewhat embarrassed by the scene. They soon began to
dress and headed back to the road to catch the taxi back to the
dock. It was Jim who first broke the silence while they waited
for their ride. “I guess we all feel a little weird about this,
but tell me, have any of you ever been so hot before in your
lives?”

Smiles appeared on the faces of the other three. Art
responded, “Pam never felt so good to me, and Peggy’s hand on my
balls almost made me pass out while I was giving it to Pam. I’m
so damned tired and drained, it will be a good three minutes
before I’m ready to go again. Hey! Did it dawn on any of you yet
that we forgot to eat?”

Laughter mingled with gasps of disbelief from each of them
as the taxi pulled up to carry them back to the ship. The ride
back was short and quiet. Matted hair and half-wet clothing
served to make the ride a little more uncomfortable than it would
have been. The taxi pulled up to the dock and deposited the tired
foursome. They gathered up their packages and began their trek up
the gang plank. Fernando greeted them as they re-entered the ship
and asked, “was your stay pleasurable, ladies and gentlemen?”

“And that’s not the half of it,” announced Pam. “That’s a
great little island you have there.” Pam and Peggy helped one
another with their gear as the men trailed behind watching each
step of the girls and quietly reading one another’s mind. They
were convinced that tomorrow would promise even greater enjoy-
ment.

CHAPTER ELEVEN – MIND SEX

Jim could feel himself becoming more interested in what
wonders hypnosis had to offer he and Peggy and their sexual
desires. He decided to take Peggy to a new level of sexual
heights. He had helped Peggy experience complete hallucination of
the senses on two different occasions. The first was to find her
on a secluded beach masturbating, and the second was a wonderful
massage by a great looking stranger. Now what? She had still
never had a stranger’s cock in her body. Jim decided that would
be the next adventure. He would introduce Peggy to this ex-
perience on Saturday night.

The week seemed to drag on. It seemed as though Saturday
would never come. Each time Jim looked at Peggy he thought about
how exciting it would be for Peggy to give her body to a strange
man; her lovely breasts, her round buttocks, her hot pussy.
Strange hands on her skin; her lips on another man’s penis; his
hairy balls resting in her hands and on the soft cheeks of her
ass. He went wild with the thought of it. And then Saturday came.

They spent their evening in the same fashion as usual. A
movie, a pizza and a bottle of wine were their entertainment. The
movie was not bad, the pizza was different and the wine was
great. Jim did have a hard time keeping his mind on anything
other than sex. As they prepared to retire, Jim’s apprehension
increased. Peggy had no idea what was to take place. As Peggy
dressed in her night clothes to get into bed, again Jim’s mind
wandered to thoughts of another man gazing on her wonderful body.
Jim snapped his fingers twice, his regular post hypnotic suggest-
ion that would place Peggy into a deep trance state. He watched
her eyes close. A warm smile appeared on her lips, and she melted
into a deep sleep.

Jim continued to bring Peggy deeper and deeper into her
trance. He suggested to her that upon reaching her deepest trance
state she would begin to feel very sexy. He continued along these
lines for quite some time until he could perceive Peggy actually
beginning to squirm. She was hot and wanted fucked. Jim told her
that he would soon wake her and when she awoke, she would find
herself all alone and extremely horny. She would dress completely
in a tight fitting outfit, get in the car and go to the all-night
grocery store.

When she reached the store, she would complete the shopping
that she was going to do the next day. While at the grocery
store, she would meet a stranger with a green ribbon in the zip-
per of his coat. As soon as she identified the green ribbon, the
man wearing the ribbon would be the most exciting man she had
ever seen. She would have trouble taking her eyes off of him.
This would be the man she always wanted to make love to.

Jim went on to explain that she would be attracted to this
man so much, because she may never have the chance to see him
again. He further told her not to concern herself with Jim be-
cause he would be out of town on business for two days. Before he
woke Peggy up he decided to give her one more post hypnotic sug-
gestion. That suggestion took the form of the length of each of
her orgasms. He would pyramid them. He told her that the inten-
sity of her climax would be double what she ever experienced
before.

After assuring her that she would remember nothing about
being in a trance, Jim woke Peggy up. Now would follow the first
test. Would she awaken, go about the business of getting ready
for the grocery store and not be able to see Jim. He waited with
a great deal of interest as he watched Peggy get ready to go to
the store. He sat in a chair in the corner of the master bedroom
silently.

Peggy got up from the bed and went into the bathroom off the
bedroom without acknowledging Jim’s presence. He never took his
eyes off Peggy as she began to pin her hair up to take a shower.
Her hair secure, she removed her night clothes, and Jim’s blood
began to race. His thick penis began to grow as he viewed her
lovely bouncing breasts and the cleave of her ass cheeks. Her
soft pubic hair was brought into view as she turned. She stopped
in front of the mirror and began to admire herself.

Her hands reached up and gently cupped her ample breasts.
Peggy pointed the nipples at the mirror and a smile crept over
her lips. As the thumb and forefinger of each hand pinched the
generous pink nipples of each mound of flesh her eyes rolled up
and closed. Maintaining her grasp on one of the nipples, she al-
lowed her other hand to dip down to her bush. Jim had never seen
Peggy alone and unaware of a spectator. He now understood what a
voyeur must feel like. His hard rod stretched to its maximum
length.

Peggy began to furiously rub her clit and manipulate her
breasts. Jim heard a soft moan and Peggy turned from the mirror
to head for the shower. Jim’s excitement continued as Peggy en-
tered the hot stream of the shower and soaped every inch of her
hot body. She toweled herself off and moved toward the dressing
table. As she bent over to open a drawer, her buttocks were of-
fered to his intense view; so pink and round and tight. Suddenly
she removed a tight kelley green pair of slacks and tossed them
on the bed next to the dressing table.

Next she removed a white knit top and placed it next to the
slacks. Peggy entered her undies drawer and withdrew a sexy pair
of panties. As she reached down for the panties, Jim could see
her heavy breasts swing down and undulate as if they had a life
of their own.

Peggy stepped into the panties and pulled them up over her
tight buttocks. She quickly donned her slacks and pulled the top
on without a bra. Admiring herself in the mirror, her hands went
to her breasts, and she felt the weight in her hands. Satisfied
that her body would look its best in this outfit, she reached for
a comb. She combed her hair and reached for her make-up case to
place the final touches on this portrait. Uncontrollably, seminal
fluid began to seep out of Jim’s straining cock. He began think-
ing about old baseball games to keep himself from blowing his en-
tire wad. Peggy left the room and quickly grabbed her coat and
keys. She was out of the door before Jim could follow her through
the house.

Jim quickly got his essentials and began looking for his
keys. He couldn’t find his god-damned keys. His mind was reeling.
Suddenly he remembered that he had left them in his overcoat,
retrieved them and headed for the garage. He was shaking with an-
ticipation as he grabbed his jacket and reached into the pocket
for his green ribbon. His wife was off to the grocery store and
would likely find more that ground chuck upon completion of her
mission. He headed toward the grocery store with his cock still
heavy with anticipation.

Jim’s heart jumped once again as he pulled into the parking
lot and saw Peggy’s van parked there. Still shaking slightly, he
exited the car and began his journey into the store. On his way,
he recovered a shopping cart in the parking lot and pushed it
toward the automatic doors. He thought how humorous it must be
that some of the observers in the area were likely thinking that
he was doing his part to bring one of the carts back to the
store. Actually, he was trying to hide his substantial hard on.
As he entered the store, his eyes began to search for Peggy. His
gaze then went to the zipper of his jacket to assure himself that
his ribbon was in place. It was. Where would she go first? He
would try the dairy isle. True to habit, Peggy was at the dairy
section viewing the offerings. Jim just stood back and watched.
She was a good shopper, moving through the isles quickly captur-
ing all of those necessities that she was so used to buying.

It wasn’t busy in the store. There were only several shop-
pers there at the time. Many of them appeared to be single men
struggling through this chore. It didn’t take Jim long to observe
that Peggy had removed her coat and hung it over the back of the
cart. Soon, it became apparent that the men in the store were
watching her fine ass as it passed. When she reached for an item,
her breasts would often swing against the material of her top and
thrill the onlookers. Jim’s cock remained hard and ready. He
decided that it was about time he allowed Peggy to notice him. He
traveled the reverse way of the traffic pattern that Peggy had
established so he could face her in his travels. As he rounded
the soup section, there she was.

Peggy was being followed casually by two men, one behind the
other. At this point they were merely pretending to shop. It was
obvious that they were benefiting from the view of her great
body. This excited Jim even more. Soon Peggy’s casual gaze met
Jim. She looked away and then her head snapped back to rivet on
the green ribbon of his jacket. She immediately began to blush.
She quickly looked away and began sneaking peeks at this
“stranger.” As she turned the corner, Jim could see that she was
trying to see more of him.

Again they appeared in the same isle, the wine section,
going in their respective directions. Peggy stopped to view the
selection, Jim continued his slow walk toward her. Jim knew Peggy
well enough to know that she would probably not make the first
move. It was his responsibility. As he closed in, he stopped and
asked her if she liked the brand of wine she held in her hand.
She indicated that she liked to try different brands and types,
and he indicated that he did also. As their conversation
developed, she became more talkative. They began to walk in the
same direction, talking about many of their interests. Her eyes
periodically moved to his bulge. Her nose became filled with his
scent. She was getting aroused just walking next to him.

They found that they had quite a bit in common, obviously,
and Jim suggested that they meet for coffee some day. Peggy indi-
cated that the idea sat well with her and assured him that she
would enjoy it. The next test was soon to come. Jim excused him-
self and told her that he enjoyed talking with her. She offered
her phone number and bid Jim good bye. As she began walking away,
Peggy’s mind must have gone into high gear. The suggestion that
she may never see this man again must have assaulted her aware-
ness. She turned and Jim continued to walk.

She caught his attention and indicated to him that she
didn’t even know his name. He told her that his name was Eddie
and, she advised him that she was Peggy. She then suddenly asked
him it he had plans for the rest of the evening. He smiled and
indicated that he did not. Peggy then told “Eddie” that she was
not committed to anything either and thought that it would be a
shame to have to drink her bottle of wine all by herself. She
couldn’t believe her own ears. Did that come out of her lips?
“Eddie” smiled and told her that it was late and she probably
should be escorted to her home anyway. “Let’s get to check out
and I’ll follow you home,” he offered. She agreed with a smile
and a shake of her head and they approached the check out
counter. Having completed this task they headed toward their
cars.

Jim actually felt as though Peggy was a stranger. She acted
a little differently. She was infinitely more sexy, and she moved
in such a way as to accentuate her lovely body. Jim continued to
imagine Peggy being with a strange man, pressing her lips to him,
touching his strange penis and offering him all of her charms.
Naughtiness – that was it. It was naughty. Every conceivable sex
act invaded his mind. He couldn’t remember being this aroused.
Soon they were at “Peggy’s home.” She pulled into the drive and
exited the van with packages in tow. She fumbled with her keys
and opened the door. Jim was directly behind her, watching her
buttocks move under the tight material. He felt it curious how
her hands shook as she placed the key in the lock to allow them
entrance.

Once inside, Peggy told “Eddie” to make himself comfortable
and she would be right with him. “Eddie” went to the couch and
collapsed. He couldn’t remember ever sitting on the couch. He
generally sat in an easy chair. He really felt as if he were in
someone else’s house. He heard Peggy getting glasses and ice to
chill the glasses. Soon she joined him in the living room,
deposited the tray of wine and sat at the opposite end of the
couch. Jim got a smirk on his face, and Peggy understood. She
told him that she had never invited anyone over before, and Jim
offered a fake frown. She then hastened to mention that she was
married and it would probably be poorly perceived that she did
invite him over.

“Eddie” told her that if she was uncomfortable, he would
leave. She indicated that she was uncomfortable, but she did not
want him to leave. She found him so interesting that she wanted
to know more about him. She wanted to know why he had accepted
her offer to come over when he didn’t even know her. Jim pulled
out all of the stops. “I find you to be one of the most exciting
women I have ever met and was hoping that I could get to know you
better. I can’t very well get to know you if you are sitting at
the other end of the couch,” he shared as he reached and put his
hand on her arm. They slowly moved toward each other and their
lips met.

Her body felt new. After twenty years of marriage, he was on
fire. He felt her body tremble as she pressed her breasts into
his chest. His hand cupped the back of her head and pulled her
toward him. Soon her tongue touched his lip and begged for admit-
tance to his hot mouth. His tongue met hers and they seemed to
melt together. Jim placed his left hand under her sweater and
found a warm breast with its nipple plump and straining. He felt
the weight of her flesh. He gently pinched her nipple, and she
sighed heavily as her tongue reached farther into his mouth. His
hand now reached down and slipped into her slacks and beneath her
panties to cup the swell of her buttocks. Dipping into the moist
canyon of her ass cheeks, he squeezed and felt her respond by
placing her hand on his now gigantic cock. Suddenly she stopped
her aggression and seemed to become concerned. Jim asked her if
there was something wrong. “Eddie, I have to make something clear
to you. I am married, and I love my husband very much. I have
never done anything like this before, and I’m concerned that it’s
wrong,” she said.

“Do you think that Jim would be really upset with us?” he
inquired.

“Actually, it would probably be quite the contrary. Jim has
hinted many times throughout our marriage that the thought of me
making it with someone else would be a real turn on for him,”
Peggy explained.

“Well, I promise not to take it too serious, if you don’t.
What do you say? You tell Jim what you want to. You know him well
enough to pick what to tell him and when,” Jim urged. She smiled
at him and placed his hand back on her soft, waiting breast.

After what seemed like only seconds, Jim reached under both
sides of Peggy’s sweater and lifted it over her head. He saw the
lovely breasts stretch upward as she raised her arms over her
head to accommodate his efforts. Her eyes were glued to his to
observe the appreciation on his face. His head immediately
dropped to her juicy nipple as his hand lifted her heavy tit to
his mouth. Again a moan escaped her lips, as her hand began work-
ing on the zipper of his pants. Soon they were both naked.

Peggy’s love tunnel was wet with her own juices. She knew
that she had never been this excited, as the cream began running
down her legs and into the crack of her ass. In a quick motion,
her head fell onto his thick bone and devoured it. Up and down
she went trying to stuff every morsel of his eight inch cock into
her throat. Her hands manipulated the hairy balls as if she were
trying to prepare his cum for its inevitable exit. He wanted to
slide his tongue into her swollen cunt but didn’t want her to
stop what she was doing. He just laid back and enjoyed what was
happening. Quickly, he felt the come boiling in his heavy balls.
He was going to ejaculate. Without a word, he withdrew his vein
covered meat from her lips. He rearranged her on the couch and
threw her legs back forcing his tongue into the deep, dark honey
pot. She even tasted different. His lips began plucking at her
now hard clit, dipping his tongue deep into her hole from time to
time.

Peggy soon let out what can only be described as a deep
grunt. Her hips began pounding against Jim’s face as she held his
head in place. Her breasts were flopping wildly as she shame-
lessly fucked his face with her dripping cunt. “Ohhhhhhhhhhhhhhh
my god – Oh – Oh – Ohhhhhhhhhhhhhh,” she cried. It went on and
on. She continued to convulse as his tongue milked the cream from
deep in her hole. He had never seen Peggy come this hard or this
long. His face was becoming covered with her love juices and
detached pubic hair. Soon she lay there completely spent and al-
most unconscious. Jim went to the rest room and acquired a towel.
He wiped his face, sat in his easy chair and continued to stroke
his huge erection.

Jim exited the chair and poured two glasses of wine. He
moved to the couch and offered one to Peggy. She took it with
what was clearly a weak hand. After a long sip on the cool wine,
she offered a huge grin and told him that she hoped he didn’t
think that she was done. He returned the smile, took a sip of his
glass and returned to his chair, stroking his heavy penis. Peggy
quickly recovered as the sexiest look came over her face. She
moved over to the chair and placed herself between this man’s
legs. She placed her lips over his flaccid penis, and he knew in-
stantly that she still had wine in her mouth. The sensation was
great. He felt the cool wine encompass his cock. Soon the wine
was gone and only her hot quick lips remained, sliding up and
down his shaft. He reached down and felt the weight of her heavy
tits, bouncing as her head pounded his penis. He looked down her
smooth back to the cleft between the cheeks of her tight ass.
Surely, heaven was like this.

Jim had the greatest urge in the world to drive his thick,
long cock into this woman. Suddenly he rose and began to push
Peggy over to the couch, spreading her legs as she fell backward.
“Wait, Eddie. Would you please fuck me like a dog. I would love
to feel your huge bone in my cunt as your thighs pound against my
ass,” she begged. Jim backed off and allowed Peggy to get on her
knees. He looked down and saw her buttocks displayed before him;
her gaping cunt with soaked hair and dripping from excitement. He
took his cock in his hand and began to stroke it once again, as
he aimed it toward her dark slit. Her breasts undulating with a
gentle bounce, she waited to be filled with this strange cock.

Jim’s thick rod encountered no resistance as it parted the
lips of her fragrant hole and slid deep into this cavern of love.
Upon initial entry, Peggy once again began to convulse with spasm
after spasm of orgasm. Her box engulfed Jim’s pounding cock and
squeezed it tight. He drove deeper and deeper into her belly.
“Fuck me, fuck me harder, fuck me deeper. Drive that bone into my
cunt, mother fucker. Fill my guts with your cream. Fuck that
cunt, squeeze my ass; harder,” she screamed.

He could take it no longer. Deep within his balls he could
feel the cream exploding for release. Bang! It erupted. The first
convulsion, he squirted a huge load of come into her cunt. He
then pulled his jumping rod from her hole and shot several vol-
leys of hot juice on her ass and back. She reached back and
started to smear the thick sticky cream over her ass and back.
She grabbed Jim’s cock and continued to milk it as she cried with
joy.

They both collapsed on the couch into one another’s arms and
fell off to sleep. Jim was the first to awaken. He went to the
rest room, cleaned up and returned with a hot wash cloth and a
towel for Peggy. As he nudged Peggy her eyes slowly opened. As
soon as she was aware, Jim snapped his fingers twice, and Peggy’s
eyes closed again. Jim told her that she would soon awaken, feel-
ing wonderful and remembering everything as though it actually
happened. She would feel no guilt and would be proud that she
finally obtained the courage to make love with a stranger. He
further told her that she could feel free to tell him about her
experience in her own good time. Peggy was awoken, freshened up,
went to bed and fell off into a wonderful natural sleep.

The next morning she was surprised to find Jim home, think-
ing that he would be gone for another day. He told her that he
had finished his business early and had missed her. She im-
mediately reached for his cock and placed it in her mouth. ‘Let
the games begin,’ he thought. He also let his mind wander about
the next experience he would treat her to. He was on fire again.

CHAPTER ELEVEN – MIND SEX

Jim could feel himself becoming more interested in what
wonders hypnosis had to offer he and Peggy and their sexual
desires. He decided to take Peggy to a new level of sexual
heights. He had helped Peggy experience complete hallucination of
the senses on two different occasions. The first was to find her
on a secluded beach masturbating, and the second was a wonderful
massage by a great looking stranger. Now what? She had still
never had a stranger’s cock in her body. Jim decided that would
be the next adventure. He would introduce Peggy to this ex-
perience on Saturday night.

The week seemed to drag on. It seemed as though Saturday
would never come. Each time Jim looked at Peggy he thought about
how exciting it would be for Peggy to give her body to a strange
man; her lovely breasts, her round buttocks, her hot pussy.
Strange hands on her skin; her lips on another man’s penis; his
hairy balls resting in her hands and on the soft cheeks of her
ass. He went wild with the thought of it. And then Saturday came.

They spent their evening in the same fashion as usual. A
movie, a pizza and a bottle of wine were their entertainment. The
movie was not bad, the pizza was different and the wine was
great. Jim did have a hard time keeping his mind on anything
other than sex. As they prepared to retire, Jim’s apprehension
increased. Peggy had no idea what was to take place. As Peggy
dressed in her night clothes to get into bed, again Jim’s mind
wandered to thoughts of another man gazing on her wonderful body.
Jim snapped his fingers twice, his regular post hypnotic suggest-
ion that would place Peggy into a deep trance state. He watched
her eyes close. A warm smile appeared on her lips, and she melted
into a deep sleep.

Jim continued to bring Peggy deeper and deeper into her
trance. He suggested to her that upon reaching her deepest trance
state she would begin to feel very sexy. He continued along these
lines for quite some time until he could perceive Peggy actually
beginning to squirm. She was hot and wanted fucked. Jim told her
that he would soon wake her and when she awoke, she would find
herself all alone and extremely horny. She would dress completely
in a tight fitting outfit, get in the car and go to the all-night
grocery store.

When she reached the store, she would complete the shopping
that she was going to do the next day. While at the grocery
store, she would meet a stranger with a green ribbon in the zip-
per of his coat. As soon as she identified the green ribbon, the
man wearing the ribbon would be the most exciting man she had
ever seen. She would have trouble taking her eyes off of him.
This would be the man she always wanted to make love to.

Jim went on to explain that she would be attracted to this
man so much, because she may never have the chance to see him
again. He further told her not to concern herself with Jim be-
cause he would be out of town on business for two days. Before he
woke Peggy up he decided to give her one more post hypnotic sug-
gestion. That suggestion took the form of the length of each of
her orgasms. He would pyramid them. He told her that the inten-
sity of her climax would be double what she ever experienced
before.

After assuring her that she would remember nothing about
being in a trance, Jim woke Peggy up. Now would follow the first
test. Would she awaken, go about the business of getting ready
for the grocery store and not be able to see Jim. He waited with
a great deal of interest as he watched Peggy get ready to go to
the store. He sat in a chair in the corner of the master bedroom
silently.

Peggy got up from the bed and went into the bathroom off the
bedroom without acknowledging Jim’s presence. He never took his
eyes off Peggy as she began to pin her hair up to take a shower.
Her hair secure, she removed her night clothes, and Jim’s blood
began to race. His thick penis began to grow as he viewed her
lovely bouncing breasts and the cleave of her ass cheeks. Her
soft pubic hair was brought into view as she turned. She stopped
in front of the mirror and began to admire herself.

Her hands reached up and gently cupped her ample breasts.
Peggy pointed the nipples at the mirror and a smile crept over
her lips. As the thumb and forefinger of each hand pinched the
generous pink nipples of each mound of flesh her eyes rolled up
and closed. Maintaining her grasp on one of the nipples, she al-
lowed her other hand to dip down to her bush. Jim had never seen
Peggy alone and unaware of a spectator. He now understood what a
voyeur must feel like. His hard rod stretched to its maximum
length.

Peggy began to furiously rub her clit and manipulate her
breasts. Jim heard a soft moan and Peggy turned from the mirror
to head for the shower. Jim’s excitement continued as Peggy en-
tered the hot stream of the shower and soaped every inch of her
hot body. She toweled herself off and moved toward the dressing
table. As she bent over to open a drawer, her buttocks were of-
fered to his intense view; so pink and round and tight. Suddenly
she removed a tight kelley green pair of slacks and tossed them
on the bed next to the dressing table.

Next she removed a white knit top and placed it next to the
slacks. Peggy entered her undies drawer and withdrew a sexy pair
of panties. As she reached down for the panties, Jim could see
her heavy breasts swing down and undulate as if they had a life
of their own.

Peggy stepped into the panties and pulled them up over her
tight buttocks. She quickly donned her slacks and pulled the top
on without a bra. Admiring herself in the mirror, her hands went
to her breasts, and she felt the weight in her hands. Satisfied
that her body would look its best in this outfit, she reached for
a comb. She combed her hair and reached for her make-up case to
place the final touches on this portrait. Uncontrollably, seminal
fluid began to seep out of Jim’s straining cock. He began think-
ing about old baseball games to keep himself from blowing his en-
tire wad. Peggy left the room and quickly grabbed her coat and
keys. She was out of the door before Jim could follow her through
the house.

Jim quickly got his essentials and began looking for his
keys. He couldn’t find his god-damned keys. His mind was reeling.
Suddenly he remembered that he had left them in his overcoat,
retrieved them and headed for the garage. He was shaking with an-
ticipation as he grabbed his jacket and reached into the pocket
for his green ribbon. His wife was off to the grocery store and
would likely find more that ground chuck upon completion of her
mission. He headed toward the grocery store with his cock still
heavy with anticipation.

Jim’s heart jumped once again as he pulled into the parking
lot and saw Peggy’s van parked there. Still shaking slightly, he
exited the car and began his journey into the store. On his way,
he recovered a shopping cart in the parking lot and pushed it
toward the automatic doors. He thought how humorous it must be
that some of the observers in the area were likely thinking that
he was doing his part to bring one of the carts back to the
store. Actually, he was trying to hide his substantial hard on.
As he entered the store, his eyes began to search for Peggy. His
gaze then went to the zipper of his jacket to assure himself that
his ribbon was in place. It was. Where would she go first? He
would try the dairy isle. True to habit, Peggy was at the dairy
section viewing the offerings. Jim just stood back and watched.
She was a good shopper, moving through the isles quickly captur-
ing all of those necessities that she was so used to buying.

It wasn’t busy in the store. There were only several shop-
pers there at the time. Many of them appeared to be single men
struggling through this chore. It didn’t take Jim long to observe
that Peggy had removed her coat and hung it over the back of the
cart. Soon, it became apparent that the men in the store were
watching her fine ass as it passed. When she reached for an item,
her breasts would often swing against the material of her top and
thrill the onlookers. Jim’s cock remained hard and ready. He
decided that it was about time he allowed Peggy to notice him. He
traveled the reverse way of the traffic pattern that Peggy had
established so he could face her in his travels. As he rounded
the soup section, there she was.

Peggy was being followed casually by two men, one behind the
other. At this point they were merely pretending to shop. It was
obvious that they were benefiting from the view of her great
body. This excited Jim even more. Soon Peggy’s casual gaze met
Jim. She looked away and then her head snapped back to rivet on
the green ribbon of his jacket. She immediately began to blush.
She quickly looked away and began sneaking peeks at this
“stranger.” As she turned the corner, Jim could see that she was
trying to see more of him.

Again they appeared in the same isle, the wine section,
going in their respective directions. Peggy stopped to view the
selection, Jim continued his slow walk toward her. Jim knew Peggy
well enough to know that she would probably not make the first
move. It was his responsibility. As he closed in, he stopped and
asked her if she liked the brand of wine she held in her hand.
She indicated that she liked to try different brands and types,
and he indicated that he did also. As their conversation
developed, she became more talkative. They began to walk in the
same direction, talking about many of their interests. Her eyes
periodically moved to his bulge. Her nose became filled with his
scent. She was getting aroused just walking next to him.

They found that they had quite a bit in common, obviously,
and Jim suggested that they meet for coffee some day. Peggy indi-
cated that the idea sat well with her and assured him that she
would enjoy it. The next test was soon to come. Jim excused him-
self and told her that he enjoyed talking with her. She offered
her phone number and bid Jim good bye. As she began walking away,
Peggy’s mind must have gone into high gear. The suggestion that
she may never see this man again must have assaulted her aware-
ness. She turned and Jim continued to walk.

She caught his attention and indicated to him that she
didn’t even know his name. He told her that his name was Eddie
and, she advised him that she was Peggy. She then suddenly asked
him it he had plans for the rest of the evening. He smiled and
indicated that he did not. Peggy then told “Eddie” that she was
not committed to anything either and thought that it would be a
shame to have to drink her bottle of wine all by herself. She
couldn’t believe her own ears. Did that come out of her lips?
“Eddie” smiled and told her that it was late and she probably
should be escorted to her home anyway. “Let’s get to check out
and I’ll follow you home,” he offered. She agreed with a smile
and a shake of her head and they approached the check out
counter. Having completed this task they headed toward their
cars.

Jim actually felt as though Peggy was a stranger. She acted
a little differently. She was infinitely more sexy, and she moved
in such a way as to accentuate her lovely body. Jim continued to
imagine Peggy being with a strange man, pressing her lips to him,
touching his strange penis and offering him all of her charms.
Naughtiness – that was it. It was naughty. Every conceivable sex
act invaded his mind. He couldn’t remember being this aroused.
Soon they were at “Peggy’s home.” She pulled into the drive and
exited the van with packages in tow. She fumbled with her keys
and opened the door. Jim was directly behind her, watching her
buttocks move under the tight material. He felt it curious how
her hands shook as she placed the key in the lock to allow them
entrance.

Once inside, Peggy told “Eddie” to make himself comfortable
and she would be right with him. “Eddie” went to the couch and
collapsed. He couldn’t remember ever sitting on the couch. He
generally sat in an easy chair. He really felt as if he were in
someone else’s house. He heard Peggy getting glasses and ice to
chill the glasses. Soon she joined him in the living room,
deposited the tray of wine and sat at the opposite end of the
couch. Jim got a smirk on his face, and Peggy understood. She
told him that she had never invited anyone over before, and Jim
offered a fake frown. She then hastened to mention that she was
married and it would probably be poorly perceived that she did
invite him over.

“Eddie” told her that if she was uncomfortable, he would
leave. She indicated that she was uncomfortable, but she did not
want him to leave. She found him so interesting that she wanted
to know more about him. She wanted to know why he had accepted
her offer to come over when he didn’t even know her. Jim pulled
out all of the stops. “I find you to be one of the most exciting
women I have ever met and was hoping that I could get to know you
better. I can’t very well get to know you if you are sitting at
the other end of the couch,” he shared as he reached and put his
hand on her arm. They slowly moved toward each other and their
lips met.

Her body felt new. After twenty years of marriage, he was on
fire. He felt her body tremble as she pressed her breasts into
his chest. His hand cupped the back of her head and pulled her
toward him. Soon her tongue touched his lip and begged for admit-
tance to his hot mouth. His tongue met hers and they seemed to
melt together. Jim placed his left hand under her sweater and
found a warm breast with its nipple plump and straining. He felt
the weight of her flesh. He gently pinched her nipple, and she
sighed heavily as her tongue reached farther into his mouth. His
hand now reached down and slipped into her slacks and beneath her
panties to cup the swell of her buttocks. Dipping into the moist
canyon of her ass cheeks, he squeezed and felt her respond by
placing her hand on his now gigantic cock. Suddenly she stopped
her aggression and seemed to become concerned. Jim asked her if
there was something wrong. “Eddie, I have to make something clear
to you. I am married, and I love my husband very much. I have
never done anything like this before, and I’m concerned that it’s
wrong,” she said.

“Do you think that Jim would be really upset with us?” he
inquired.

“Actually, it would probably be quite the contrary. Jim has
hinted many times throughout our marriage that the thought of me
making it with someone else would be a real turn on for him,”
Peggy explained.

“Well, I promise not to take it too serious, if you don’t.
What do you say? You tell Jim what you want to. You know him well
enough to pick what to tell him and when,” Jim urged. She smiled
at him and placed his hand back on her soft, waiting breast.

After what seemed like only seconds, Jim reached under both
sides of Peggy’s sweater and lifted it over her head. He saw the
lovely breasts stretch upward as she raised her arms over her
head to accommodate his efforts. Her eyes were glued to his to
observe the appreciation on his face. His head immediately
dropped to her juicy nipple as his hand lifted her heavy tit to
his mouth. Again a moan escaped her lips, as her hand began work-
ing on the zipper of his pants. Soon they were both naked.

Peggy’s love tunnel was wet with her own juices. She knew
that she had never been this excited, as the cream began running
down her legs and into the crack of her ass. In a quick motion,
her head fell onto his thick bone and devoured it. Up and down
she went trying to stuff every morsel of his eight inch cock into
her throat. Her hands manipulated the hairy balls as if she were
trying to prepare his cum for its inevitable exit. He wanted to
slide his tongue into her swollen cunt but didn’t want her to
stop what she was doing. He just laid back and enjoyed what was
happening. Quickly, he felt the come boiling in his heavy balls.
He was going to ejaculate. Without a word, he withdrew his vein
covered meat from her lips. He rearranged her on the couch and
threw her legs back forcing his tongue into the deep, dark honey
pot. She even tasted different. His lips began plucking at her
now hard clit, dipping his tongue deep into her hole from time to
time.

Peggy soon let out what can only be described as a deep
grunt. Her hips began pounding against Jim’s face as she held his
head in place. Her breasts were flopping wildly as she shame-
lessly fucked his face with her dripping cunt. “Ohhhhhhhhhhhhhhh
my god – Oh – Oh – Ohhhhhhhhhhhhhh,” she cried. It went on and
on. She continued to convulse as his tongue milked the cream from
deep in her hole. He had never seen Peggy come this hard or this
long. His face was becoming covered with her love juices and
detached pubic hair. Soon she lay there completely spent and al-
most unconscious. Jim went to the rest room and acquired a towel.
He wiped his face, sat in his easy chair and continued to stroke
his huge erection.

Jim exited the chair and poured two glasses of wine. He
moved to the couch and offered one to Peggy. She took it with
what was clearly a weak hand. After a long sip on the cool wine,
she offered a huge grin and told him that she hoped he didn’t
think that she was done. He returned the smile, took a sip of his
glass and returned to his chair, stroking his heavy penis. Peggy
quickly recovered as the sexiest look came over her face. She
moved over to the chair and placed herself between this man’s
legs. She placed her lips over his flaccid penis, and he knew in-
stantly that she still had wine in her mouth. The sensation was
great. He felt the cool wine encompass his cock. Soon the wine
was gone and only her hot quick lips remained, sliding up and
down his shaft. He reached down and felt the weight of her heavy
tits, bouncing as her head pounded his penis. He looked down her
smooth back to the cleft between the cheeks of her tight ass.
Surely, heaven was like this.

Jim had the greatest urge in the world to drive his thick,
long cock into this woman. Suddenly he rose and began to push
Peggy over to the couch, spreading her legs as she fell backward.
“Wait, Eddie. Would you please fuck me like a dog. I would love
to feel your huge bone in my cunt as your thighs pound against my
ass,” she begged. Jim backed off and allowed Peggy to get on her
knees. He looked down and saw her buttocks displayed before him;
her gaping cunt with soaked hair and dripping from excitement. He
took his cock in his hand and began to stroke it once again, as
he aimed it toward her dark slit. Her breasts undulating with a
gentle bounce, she waited to be filled with this strange cock.

Jim’s thick rod encountered no resistance as it parted the
lips of her fragrant hole and slid deep into this cavern of love.
Upon initial entry, Peggy once again began to convulse with spasm
after spasm of orgasm. Her box engulfed Jim’s pounding cock and
squeezed it tight. He drove deeper and deeper into her belly.
“Fuck me, fuck me harder, fuck me deeper. Drive that bone into my
cunt, mother fucker. Fill my guts with your cream. Fuck that
cunt, squeeze my ass; harder,” she screamed.

He could take it no longer. Deep within his balls he could
feel the cream exploding for release. Bang! It erupted. The first
convulsion, he squirted a huge load of come into her cunt. He
then pulled his jumping rod from her hole and shot several vol-
leys of hot juice on her ass and back. She reached back and
started to smear the thick sticky cream over her ass and back.
She grabbed Jim’s cock and continued to milk it as she cried with
joy.

They both collapsed on the couch into one another’s arms and
fell off to sleep. Jim was the first to awaken. He went to the
rest room, cleaned up and returned with a hot wash cloth and a
towel for Peggy. As he nudged Peggy her eyes slowly opened. As
soon as she was aware, Jim snapped his fingers twice, and Peggy’s
eyes closed again. Jim told her that she would soon awaken, feel-
ing wonderful and remembering everything as though it actually
happened. She would feel no guilt and would be proud that she
finally obtained the courage to make love with a stranger. He
further told her that she could feel free to tell him about her
experience in her own good time. Peggy was awoken, freshened up,
went to bed and fell off into a wonderful natural sleep.

The next morning she was surprised to find Jim home, think-
ing that he would be gone for another day. He told her that he
had finished his business early and had missed her. She im-
mediately reached for his cock and placed it in her mouth. ‘Let
the games begin,’ he thought. He also let his mind wander about
the next experience he would treat her to. He was on fire again.

CHAPTER TWELVE – MIND SEX

Jim sat in the office as his mind began to settle down from
the day’s activity. His pushed back from the desk, leaned back in
his chair, placed his hands behind his head and began to think
about the last hypnosex experience with Peggy, his wife. As his
thoughts began to touch those moments when his wife was making
love with another man, his cock started to grow. With eyes closed
his mind began painting pictures of Peggy parting her soaked
pussy so that “Eddie” could bury his straining cock. He was con-
vinced that it was time for another experiment. He would prepare
for another mind altering experience.

The ride home was a blur. His mind focused on the events
that he would create for his wife’s enjoyment. Up until this
point she had never shared with Jim that she had experienced
“another man.” He pulled into the drive and pushed the button to
open the garage. Peggy was in the kitchen as he entered. She
smiled, welcomed him home and offered her lovely lips to him.
Peggy continued her efforts to complete dinner as Jim went into
the bedroom to change for dinner. As he undressed, he was happy
to see that the thoughts he was having on the way home nicely af-
fected the heaviness and length of his penis. He pulled it out
and began stroking it. He could feel his nipples tingling at the
thought of a new experience for Peggy. Jim dressed and made his
way out of the bedroom.

Jim entered the dining room and walked up behind Peggy plac-
ing his extended rod against the crack of her ass. He reached up
under her sweat shirt and cupped her bra-less breasts. Her
nipples stabbed his respective palms, and his cock jumped. She
pushed back slightly and indicated that she expected some of
“that” later and giggled. He assured her that she would be
pleasantly surprised. “What does that mean?” she inquired.

“You’ll see sweetheart. I want to see the look on your face
when you get it, so I won’t spoil it now,” he added. Jim was
trying to feel Peggy out about the last experience she had, to
determine whether he was moving too fast and whether it turned
her on as much as it did him.

“Tell me honey; with the exception of Marty, your brother’s
friend, have you ever entertained any thoughts about making it
with another man?” Jim inquired after they had finished most of
their meal.

“You really do want me to fuck someone else, don’t you? You
know Jim, I don’t really know how to take you sometimes. I get
concerned that if I do experience another man you will find that
you don’t really want that. I also get concerned that you will
think I am a slut”, Peggy responded.

“I told you before honey, that I would get a little jealous,
but it would be a great turn on for me. I know you love me, and a
piece of ass wouldn’t change that. I have more faith in our
relationship after twenty years of marriage to think that I would
care less for you. It’s actually my request. Why would I get
angry with you. Like I told you before; if you ever want to or
get the chance to have a strange cock in you, I would love it”,
Jim assured her.

“OK, I’ll take a chance. I did get fucked Jim. It was great,
and I wanted to tell you about it, but I was afraid to, because I
didn’t want to upset you”, she began to ramble. She got up from
the table and turned away from Jim as she finished her sentence.
Jim could feel the blood begin to flow in his loins, but he was a
little concerned about Peggy.

“Oh honey, you don’t have to worry about that. You’ve said
it. I know it now, and I’m happy for you,” Jim said as he ap-
proached her from behind. He grabbed her arms and slowly turned
her to face him. Jim looked into her eyes, smiled and kissed her.

“Are you sure that you’re not mad?” she asked. She was trem-
bling slightly as she nestled into his strong arms.

“No honey, I promise that not only am I not angry, I am very
turned on by it. Would you feel comfortable telling me about it?”
he asked.

“Give me a minute while I think of where to begin. I’ll put
on some coffee,” She said. Jim watched her move about the dining
room. His blood was beginning to boil as he saw her buttocks move
under her tight sweat pants and her breasts sway under her shirt.
He began to remember how Peggy reacted to what she thought was a
stranger. He recalled how powerful her orgasms were. He could see
“Eddie’s” hands on her breasts, his lips on her nipples and his
thick cock ramming her hole.

Peggy put a cup of coffee in front of Jim and began speaking
quietly, “I really don’t know what got into me. It was so out of
character. I went to the store to pick up a few things while you
were out of town. I entered the store and really became conscious
of several men in the place. It seemed like they were all looking
at me. I started feeling really sexy. After a short time, I ran
into one man that really seemed to turn me on. I don’t know what
it was about him. I just began thinking about how it would be to
touch him, have him touch me and I wanted to see his body. I’m
never like that. We talked and he really seemed to be too good to
be true. He was intelligent, witty and not pushy. I almost let
him walk out of the store, and then something came over me. I
decided that if I could get this guy to come home with me I
would. I kept hearing your voice in the back of my head telling
me that you wouldn’t mind, and it would turn you on. I was
shocked when he agreed to come over for some wine. You look like
you really enjoy hearing this.”

Jim stood up, unzipped his trousers and displayed his im-
mense cock. She had never seen it this big. It’s head was swollen
and shiny. It looked like a huge tower. Jim said, “this should
tell you how I feel about it.” She went on to explain, in detail,
what occurred as Jim stroked his cock. Peggy became so horny
telling Jim about it, that she put her hand between her legs,
pressed against her clit and swayed back and forth as she
finished the story. Jim reminded her that he thought it was won-
derful that she was able to have this new experience and en-
couraged her to feel free to express herself in the future. Both
rose and moved toward one another in the dining room. They fell
into each others arms and joined in a deep kiss. Jim’s hands were
all over Peggy. She began pumping against his leg as he continued
to whisper sexy things in her ear about the man she had made love
with. They decided that they would go into bed.

As they reached the bed, Peggy crawled up pulling Jim after
her. As her head hit the pillow, Jim snapped his fingers twice.
Peggy’s smile began to fade and her eyes closed, as she seemed to
melt into the bed. She became completely relaxed and fell into a
deep sleep. Jim did what he could to make her more comfortable.
He adjusted the pillow, straightened her legs and told her that
she would fall deeper asleep than she ever had. She was again
ready to accept any suggestions that Jim would offer.

“When you awaken, I will be out of town again. You will
begin to feel very sexy and horny. You will masturbate and enjoy
a beautiful climax, but it won’t seem to be enough. You will want
to fill your love hole with a thick, long, glistening penis. All
you will be able to think of is this long cock. You can almost
taste it now. You will want to hold someone’s heavy, hairy balls
in your hand. You will feel your swollen nipples tingle in an-
ticipation. Your breasts and buttocks will long to be held. You
are beginning to feel the need increase now.

After you masturbate, you will dress in a sexy outfit and go
out to a single’s bar to see if there is anyone there who inter-
ests you. When you enter, I will be there but you will not be
able to see me. You will not notice me in any way. You will then
sit at the bar by yourself and order a glass of wine. Several men
may come up to you, but you will all but ignore them. If they ask
you any questions, you will coldly tell them that you are waiting
for a friend. If a man comes up to you and you hear the words
‘Green Ribbon,’ you will become interested in this man. He will
be very similar in appearance to the man that you met in the
grocery store. You will not want this man to get away. You will
want to get to know him better. If you hear the word
‘Catastrophe,” you will explain to the stranger that although you
think he is nice, you are a married woman and must get home. If
you are comfortable with this man, you will feel free to invite
him to your house for drinks. If everything feels right and you
decide to make love, you will do so in the bedroom.” Jim was sure
that in this fashion, he could protect her from unwholesome
types, someone who would turn sour during their conversation and
direct her in terms of who she would be leaving with. The entire
time that Peggy spent in the trance state, Jim’s cock was hard
and anxious to spill. He controlled it, because he wanted to
remain hot to see what the rest of the evening held. He told
Peggy to remain in the trance state until he woke her.

Jim went to the basement and disconnected the cable from the
cable service and reconnected it to a VCR in the recreation room.
He then connected the wire from the TV to a video camera that sat
on top of a high dresser. After a little adjusting of the camera,
her returned to the basement to see that he would have a ring-
side seat for anything that would occur in the bedroom. Jim
returned to the bedroom to awaken Peggy. She slowly became con-
scious. Jim sat in the chair in the corner of the room and
watched.

Peggy began to squirm on the bed. Her hands went under her
shirt and grabbed her bra-less breasts. She began to shake them
and pinch at the nipples. Soon she removed it utterly and con-
tinued to deeply massage her breasts. This was something that Jim
rarely saw. She slipped her hand into her pants as her head bent
back into the pillow. Shortly, in one motion, Peggy slipped her
thumbs into the waistband of her sweats and slid them and her
panties down her hips and off. Her hand went immediately to her
slit and began rubbing her clit furiously. Breasts bouncing and
hand gyrating in her quim, Peggy convulsed into marvelous orgasm.
Her eyes squeezed tightly shut, and her mouth opened, gasping for
air.

Jim was forced to spill his cream as he watched Peggy mas-
turbate. He continued to stroke his weapon as he watched Peggy
get up from the bed and move toward the shower. He could never
get enough of the sight of her lovely buttocks as they rolled
with each step. Jim wished that the whole world could see and ap-
preciate this beautiful view. Peggy pinned up her long brown hair
and stepped into the shower.

Good use of the time was made by Jim as he waited for Peggy
to dress. He prepared himself in the main bath room and double
checked the video equipment. He could feel himself begin to
shiver as he saw Peggy walk across the bed room while she
dressed. Preparations having been made, Jim went out to his car,
pulled it down the street and waited for Peggy to exit the house.
He didn’t have to wait long, as soon he saw Peggy’s car pulling
out of the driveway and heading down the street. He was directly
behind her. She drove down the major highway for about four miles
and turned into a local single’s lounge. He crawled slowly into
the lot and turned out his lights. Jim watched her confidently
walk from the car to the lounge. He had never remembered her
holding her head so self-confidently.

As she disappeared inside the lounge, Jim exited his car and
followed her. When he entered, he saw her sitting at the bar. She
looked great and already Jim observed a few of the men looking
her over. He took a position about three stools away from hers
and ordered a drink. There was no one in the bar that he recog-
nized. He had a little concern about that previous to entering
the place as he lived so closely. Soon one of the patrons saun-
tered over to her and asked her something. Jim couldn’t quite
hear what it was. She turned to him and said something, and he
returned to his seat. This happened on two other occasions with
the same result. Suddenly, a rather tall, nice looking man in his
mid-thirties walked into the lounge and his eyes traveled over
the bar. When he saw Peggy, his eyes seemed to light up. He began
walking in the direction of her bar stool. He sat directly next
to Peggy but said nothing. Jim did feel comfortable with this
man. He felt confident that Peggy would enjoy him.

“Green ribbon,” issued from Jim’s lips. Peggy seemed to
relax when she heard these words and crossed her shapely legs.
Soon the man next to her said something to her, and Jim observed
her turn toward the man and acknowledge him followed by a bit of
a chuckle. Jim began to get excited. It wasn’t long before he
noticed the man getting up to pull Peggy’s chair out. They walked
together toward the dance floor and glided into each other’s
arms. It was a slow dance and Peggy’s body was pressed against
this stranger. Jim’s excitement continued to grow as he saw the
man’s hand periodically dip down and touch Peggy’s buttocks. He
wondered what must have been going through the stranger’s mind as
Peggy’s lovely tits were pressed against his chest. They danced
closer and closer as the minutes went by. Finally, they returned
to the bar and ordered another drink. Jim followed their lead and
ordered another.

Jim watched them dance two times more and felt that this
would be a hot experience for all three of them. He wondered what
they must be talking about. Once again the stranger and Peggy
began to get up. This time it was not to dance but rather to
leave. The stranger held Peggy’s coat while she slipped into it,
and Jim watched as the stranger’s hands lingered on the lapels as
they covered Peggy’s ample breasts. Out the door they went fol-
lowed by Jim. Jim got to his car first, as his was closer to the
door. He was torn between sitting to see if they would neck in
the car or rushing home to prepare himself for the show he hoped
to have. He elected the latter and sped out of the parking lot
toward home.

As soon as Jim reached home, he parked the car and slipped
into the house. Down the stairs he went and locked the door to
the recreation room. He turned on the VCR and the monitor and
again began to shake with anticipation. The moments seemed to be
hours. He sat with frustration creeping into his bones when sud-
denly he heard a car in the drive. Peggy and the stranger wasted
no time in getting into the house. Jim could faintly hear the
sounds of glasses and a wine cork being extracted with a pop. He
sat and watched with anticipation. Nothing appeared on the
monitor. He wished that he had the foresight to set one up in the
living room.

When Jim was just about to think that nothing would happen,
he saw Peggy enter the bedroom. She walked over to the clothes
tree and immediately removed her outfit. Jim’s heart jumped as he
saw her shed her bra and panties. She reached into a drawer of
the dresser and removed a little lavender teddy with matching
panties. His cock jumped to attention as he watched her pull the
panties up over the balls of her buttocks and slide the teddy
over her head. She smoothed her hair, ran a comb through it and
admired herself in the mirror. This also excited Jim. She was
primping. He had never really seen this side of her. He felt like
a voyeur, and he loved it. Soon Peggy exited the room.

Jim sat impatiently waiting for Peggy and the stranger to
return to the bedroom. It wasn’t long. Now he could hear them.
The stranger’s name was Jeff, and he followed Peggy over to the
area of the bed. Jim switched on the VCR. Their hands were all
over one another. Peggy’s hands dropped to Jeff’s trousers and
began working on the zipper. Suddenly, she dropped to her knees,
and Jim could see her free Jeff’s huge cock. Immediately, she
opened her mouth and engulfed his straining penis. Jim almost
came in his pants. He took his own cock out and began to stroke
it in long slow movements. He could see his wife’s lips cover
this huge cock. Jim wondered if this is how it looked when she
sucked his manhood. Peggy helped Jeff as he shed the rest of his
clothes. Jeff’s cock jumped up and down as he moved over the a
chair to set his clothes down. Jim could see Jeff’s heavy balls
bouncing with his large penis stretching heavenward. Peggy’s
hands returned to his balls and her mouth to the head of his
cock.

Peggy pulled Jeff over to the bed and they collapsed in one
another’s arms. Only moments went by and Peggy’s teddy and
panties were tossed to the floor. Her hands clawed Jeff’s tight
buttocks and continued to return to his thick member. Jim went
wild as he watched Jeff cup the cheeks of Peggy’s tight ass
cheeks and squeeze them. Jeff’s hand dipped into the warm moist
cleft between Peggy’s buttocks and down to her hot hole. The
stranger’s head searched for and found her beautiful nipples and
began to suck hard. Jim could hear Peggy say, “fuck me, I need
fucked, I need fucked now Jeff. Put your big cock in my slippery
pussy and fuck my brains out. Yes that’s it, bite my nipples as
you drive that big bone in my hot cunt hole.” Jim was going wild.
He couldn’t take it. His cock began to erupt in huge gobs of jism
into the palm of his hand. He continued to stoke his cock as her
heard the lovely horny screams of Peggy and Jeff’s deep grunts as
they collapsed together on the bed. What a great climax! The next
was sure to be better.

The next thing that Jim wanted to orchestrate was being in
the room and participating in Peggy’s next adventure. But surely
that should be a story in itself.

CHAPTER THIRTEEN – MIND SEX

It was a quiet evening in the den as Jim heard the clock
strike seven. Has hands moved effortlessly over the keyboard of
the computer, writing a letter to a computer friend in Baltimore.
The letter had served the purpose of turning him on as he shared
some rather sensual thoughts. Peggy was washing her hair, and
music was playing softly on the compact disc player.

Having finished his thoughts, his mind turned to the sight
of Jeff’s long wet shaft driving in Peggy’s dripping love tunnel.
That had to be one of the hottest times he had ever experienced.
It was the first time that Peggy had ever had a strange cock in-
side her body. Jim closed his eyes and remembered the sight of
Jeff’s hands on her well rounded buttocks. He could see his lips
on Peggy’s nipples; his teeth slightly and tenderly biting the
rock-hard pink tips. Jeff’s huge hairy balls resting in Peggy’s
hands. Her perfectly shaped lips spreading to admit the bulbous
head of Jeff’s straining cock. The thought that drove him the
wildest was when Peggy was on her hands and knees. Jeff came up
behind her with cock in hand and slipped it into Peggy’s dripping
cunt. Her lovely breasts were dangling and swaying. Jeff reached
around and filled his hands with tit flesh as he drove his thick
rod deep inside Peggy’s hole. Jim almost had a climax just think-
ing about it. He had to create yet another memory and wasn’t
quite sure how he would do it.

He had a good friend that always teased Peggy about how
lovely her body was. Tony often followed Peggy through the house
with his eyes when he came over. Peggy seemed to enjoy Tony’s
eyes on her body. A few times when they were in close proximity,
Jim had noticed that Tony had “accidentally” touched Peggy. One
time, when Tony was helping her lift a chair to move it, Jim was
sure he noticed Tony’s hands brush up against Peggy’s ample
breasts and linger a little longer than was necessary. Yet
another time, when they had gone fishing together, Tony came up
behind Peggy and seemed to press himself into her fanny to
demonstrate how to cast the line. Peggy didn’t seem to pull away
and it was obvious that Tony wanted his cock in her. From time to
time their eyes would seemed locked in silent desire. Jim had
even kidded Peggy about how Tony would die to have his hands on
her naked flesh. It was apparent that Peggy had become excited at
the prospect.

He was somewhat concerned what Tony, or for that matter,
Peggy would think if he simply suggested that Tony fuck her. No.
That just wouldn’t do. He had to find another way. He wanted Tony
to have the benefit of Peggy’s lovely body, but he didn’t want
Tony to know just yet. He and Tony had previously cavorted
together. They had previously enjoyed the same woman or women
together. How would it be if he told Tony that he found this
great woman, she was a real fox and she fucked like a mink. Would
Tony be interested in meeting her with Jim at a motel. It might
work.

Jim would have to shroud the evening in mystery. The lights
would be subdued. Peggy could even wear some kind of a fancy
mask. If she wore her hair differently than she usually did, Tony
would never suspect until it was too late that their lovely sex
kitten was Peggy. The decision was made. Jim was convinced that
she was ready. He would hypnotize Peggy and give her a post hyp-
notic suggestion that she was the most lovely sex slave in the
world. She would assume the role of a high priced call girl. He
would send her to the motel to check in and prepare for her two
lovers. He and Tony would arrive and suck and fuck to their
hearts content.

Now the task was to prepare Tony. They sat at the downtown
cafe that they usually frequented after work. Here they often met
with and got to know several women. Jim asked Tony if he had
recently got any new pussy. Tony indicated that it had been a
couple of months, and he was ready to fuck a snake if Jim would
hold it down. “Listen Tony, what would you say if I told you that
I ran into this great lady. She is about 5′3″, 115 pounds, light
brown hair, lovely heavy titties, beautiful pink nipples, has a
cute little waist, with an absolutely wonderful ass and a great
set of legs. Not only that, but she wants to fuck both of us.

“Get out of here. Where? Who do I have to kill?” Tony
humorously inquired. Jim could see the interest in his sex-crazed
buddy. Tony was a nice looking guy, and the thought of him enjoy-
ing Peggy’s goodies was beginning to drive him nuts.

“I’m serious. I talked with this lady, she is about forty
years old, and she said that she would love to take us both on.
Does forty years old bother you,” Jim asked.

“Hell no. Many ladies don’t even get good until they’re
about thirty or so. They have more experience for the most part.
The best piece of ass I ever had was thirty-eight. I’m game. When
do we meet this princess?” Tony panted.

Jim informed Tony that he had tentatively set them up for
Friday night at about eight o’clock. He further added that she
would meet them at a motel. They were supposed to bring a bottle
of wine and their cocks. Jim when on to say that she was a little
shy and got a kick out of wearing masks and sexy clothes. Tony’s
eyes were bulging as he listened with lust. The trap was
set.Thursday evening, as Jim was preparing for bed, he decided to
put Peggy into a trance and give her the necessary post-hypnotic
suggestions. As always, he snapped his fingers twice, and Peggy
relaxed into a deep hypnotic sleep. He brought her deeper and
deeper into her trance. He asked her several questions about pre-
vious orchestrated fantasies as his eight inch cock began to
grow. He loved hearing from her lips how she had enjoyed the at-
tentions of other lovers. He could see her breasts swell as she
related her deepest feelings. The soft lips of her vagina filled
with lust blood at the thought of her sexual escapades. He could
see her beginning to rub her legs together as her excitement
grew. Jim asked her if she would like to make love with two men.
Peggy responded by telling Jim how it would really excite her to
have his cock in her mouth as a stranger filled her pussy with
his long pole.

Jim directed Peggy to clear her mind of all thoughts. He
then advised her that on the following night at six o’clock she
would become tired, go into the bed room and lay down on the bed.
She would begin thinking of her previous adventures, become ex-
tremely aroused. She would close her eyes and again fall into a
deep trance. She would sleep for about five minutes. When she
awoke, she would walk over to the mirror and when she looked into
the mirror, she would see the most attractive call girl in the
world. Her only desire was to service her customers to the best
of her ability. She would get cleaned up, go to the motel, obtain
a room and await her customers. He further indicated that she
would bring some very sexy clothes and a facial mask with her.
She would wear the clothes and the mask. While she would feel
free to remove the clothes at any time she chose, she would feel
compelled to keep the mask on until she heard her name, Peggy.

When she heard her name, she would remove the mask and real-
ize that her customers were Jim and Tony. She would not feel un-
comfortable about this. She would remember everything and enjoy
each experience of the night. She was asked if she understood
everything and was directed to repeat it. This she did without
hesitation. The stage was set. Jim woke Peggy up and found that
she was extremely aroused. They enjoyed one another as they often
did after such sessions.

Friday morning found Jim with a huge erection. This was not
uncommon, but he was unusually large this morning. His anticipa-
tion kept him hard most of the day. Tony called at about two
o’clock in the afternoon to verify the night’s arrangements. Jim
assured him that everything was on for the Holiday Inn at eight
o’clock. Tony indicated that he would meet Jim at the cafe at
six.

Jim didn’t go home from work, but went directed to the cafe
at about 5:30. He engaged in some small talk with some of the
regulars, and Tony came bouncing in at about 5:45 rubbing his
hands together. “Where is Peggy tonight?” Tony asked.

“Who knows. Maybe she’s out finding her own piece of tail.”
Jim said with tongue in cheek. He could only imagine the look on
Tony’s face when he found out.

“Yea, sure Jim. You’d just shit if Peggy fucked around on
you. Although, I have to admit, with a woman like that around the
house, I don’t have the foggiest notion of why you would ever
stick your dick in anyone else,” Tony commented.

“I guess people are something like taste in candy bars Tony.
Sometimes we feel like having a Milky Way, and every now and then
you want some other kind. If all you ever ate was Milky Way, you
would get tired of them. Have some other kind and the Milky Way
is even better the next time. Your wife is a knock out, and you
are going to suck and fuck someone else. Why is that?” Jim in-
quired.

“I see what you mean. I never quite looked at it that way
before. The way you described this woman has really got me inter-
ested. What else can you tell me about her?” Tony quizzed.

“I told you quite a bit. She is about forty years old, great
body, sexy way about her, gives great head and really enjoys com-
ing. You will love it when you shoot your wad in this angel. She
will scream and cum in gushes,” Jim assured him.

“Phone call, Jim,” the bar maid announced. Dax picked up the
phone and spoke briefly. Tony thought that it had to be their
princess calling with the room number.

They finished a few more drinks and ordered a couple of
bottles of wine to go. Tony was visibly ready to fuck. He sat
there anxiously looking at his watch. It was time for them to
move over to the Holiday Inn. Jim told Tony to follow him, and
they were on their way.

As they approached the room, Tony was almost shaking as he
thought about lovely undulating breasts with juicy pink nipples.
Jim wanted to shake but didn’t want to give anything away. He
kept himself very calm and collected. Soon they stood in front of
the door and looked at each other. Jim said, “what are you wait-
ing for Tony, knock on the door.” Tony tapped lightly and heard
from within a request to come in.

The door was unlocked. They entered quietly noting that the
only light on was a dim light just inside the door. The voice
that they heard was a husky whisper. “Come in gentlemen; make
yourselves at home. I hope it’s not too dark in here for you, but
I like it subdued. There are glasses in the foyer. Fix us a glass
of wine and get your asses over here. Both men were periodically
shivering with excitement, thinking about the mystery of it all.

Tony poured the wine into three glasses on a tray while Jim
approached the bed. There she was. She graced the bed in the most
seductive fashion. Lying across the open sheets, Peggy was
dressed in a lace black teddy with built in wire bra holding her
lovely breasts up for inspection, garter belt, black stockings
and spike heels. Adorning the upper portion of her face was a
black cat mask with red feathers framing her face. Hot. Very hot
was all Jim could think. His cock was rock-hard. This was his
wife. He had never seen this outfit before and continued to be-
come even more aroused. “Hello Janet. Have you been waiting
long?” Jim asked.

“Too long. Now get over here and warm me up mother fucker. I
need some of that glorious cock,” she demanded in her throaty
manner. Jim immediately melted onto the bed. Tony almost felt as
though he were being left out until Jim introduced them. Tony
told “Janet” that he was enchanted and began to remove his shirt.
Jim was kissing Peggy and noticed how Tony riveted his eyes on
her body as he continued to undress. Jim indicated that they both
had an unfair advantage as he still had all of his clothes on.

Peggy said, “listen Jim, you and I have been around the cor-
ner before. Why don’t you have a glass of wine while Tony and I
get to know one another a little better.” Jim’s blood began to
boil. He anxiously awaited the moment when they would first
touch. Tony was no prude and had stripped all of his clothes and
left them where they fell. He was hotter than a firecracker. The
electric moment came. Tony, who had so often wanted to touch
Peggy was now touching her and had no idea who she was. He began
very gently by touching his lips to Peggy’s.

Soon their tongues touched and the kiss became more pas-
sionate. Jim watched as Tony’s experienced hands began searching
for the hooks to her garment. It soon fell aside. Her breasts
fell into the subdued light much to Jim’s excitement. Tony momen-
tarily pulled back from Peggy to gaze at her gorgeous mounds.
They were perfect in every way. They rolled gently from side to
side with Tony’s advances. Her now hard nipples brushed against
the hair on his chest. He reached up to cup one of the beautiful
globes and pinch a nipple as he maintained his assault with his
tongue in her mouth. Jim had everything to do to keep himself
from coming in his pants as he heard Peggy begin to moan as he
had never heard her moan before.

Tony released the snaps between Peggy legs that held the
bottom of the teddy in place. It was cast aside, and Jim watched
as Tony’s hand dipped down into Peggy’s soft pussy curls with one
hand as his other hand filled itself with pliant ass flesh. Jim
had removed his clothing and was slowly stroking his thickening
shaft. He had to be careful as he could come at any moment with
such a hot scene in front of him. Jim watched as Tony’s lips
began sucking harder on Peggy’s pert nipples. Her moans increased
in intensity, and she started rubbing her clit against Tony.
Peggy’s lover touched his lips to her belly and continued trail-
ing down to her fragrant muff. Peggy moved around on top of Tony
to accommodate a position of 69 and lifted Tony’s towering shaft
into her mouth. She took this love organ deep inside her mouth
and began to suck slowly.

Jim’s excitement continued to grow as he saw the globes of
Peggy’s ass come into view and Tony’s hands surround them. Jim
moved toward the bed stroking his gigantic member. He reached
down and felt the weight of one of Peggy’s heavy breasts as his
hand moved up and down the length of his cock. Peggy reached
around and drew Jim over to her. She released Tony’s cock and

replaced it with Jim’s. Just when Tony was about to feel as if he
had been abandoned, Peggy switched to suck his tool again. Back
and forth she went bringing bliss to both men. Soon, both men
felt Peggy begin to change positions. They released their respec-
tive grips as Peggy got on her knees, waving her fanny in the
air.

“Tony, I want your thick bone in my hole now,” she said.
Tony quickly agreed and moved into position for a rear approach.
He looked at the twin globes seemingly suspended in air and could
smell the fragrant odor of her dripping love tunnel. Tony guided
his now huge cock to the entrance to her gaping hair covered
hole. He could see the soft pink lips pouting out, waiting for
his organ. As the large mushroom-shaped head of his cock ap-
proached Peggy’s slick quim, Jim watched in rapture stroking his
own monster. Tony’s bone came closer and closer. Jim moved around
in front of Peggy and offered his penis to her mouth. As Peggy’s
lips started to engulf Jim’s cock, a deep moan escaped Peggy’s
lips and deep hot breath caressed Jim’s cock. Tony’s penis was
beginning to spread the lips of Peggy’s pussy. Slick with Peggy’s
emissions, Tony entered her effortlessly. Deeper and deeper his
cock traveled until his hairy balls were slapping against her wet
pussy.

Peggy began to suck deeply on Jim’s cock as Tony began pump-
ing slowly. As he withdrew his cock from Peggy’s dripping cunt,
Tony noticed how his thick shaft was glistening with her juices.
Again he pressed forward and felt Peggy press her ass harder
against his bone. She continued to suck on Jim’s cock. Then she
hollered to Tony, “Fuck that cunt hole mother fucker. Fuck it
harder. Deeper. Now.” Her mouth continued to draw deeply on Jim’s
cock. Tony was stroking wildly now. In and out. Deeper and
deeper. He twisted his hips as he drove forward and upward. He
rotated his long tool inside of Peggy’s hot cunt as he reached
forward and grasped one of her taunt nipples.

Jim drove his cock into his wife’s mouth and reached for her
other breast. The three of them continued to pound at one another
until Peggy felt a new tightness in Tony’s cock. He was going to
go off. She reached between her legs and began to massage Tony’s
swaying balls. He drove once deep and hard as his hands grasped
Peggy’s tightening buttocks. Peggy could feel the thick gobs of
cum shoot deep into her fuck hole. As Jim watched Peggy’s mouth
slide up and down his cock, he noticed her eyes, through her
mask, roll up into her head. At this point he knew she was com-
ing. Jim’s rod began to convulse as his cream crept up and out of
the head of his swollen member. Over and over again he felt gobs
of jism squirt into Peggy’s mouth. She was now grunting deep3ly;
trying to get the most of her quaking hole. Tony, Peggy and Jim
fell to the bed. They were all panting and somewhat out of
breath. Jim heard Tony say that he had never had such a nut as
this. No one moved for about fifteen minutes.

Suddenly, Peggy got up from the bed and moved toward the
rest room. Tony looked at Jim under half closed eyelids and asked
him, “where in the hell did you find this gorgeous animal?” Jim
merely smiled in response. Peggy returned after refreshing her-
self and poured three more glasses of wine, handing one to each
of her lovers.

She pulled a side chair over to the bed and sat opposite
them. Tony said, “listen lovely lady, I would sure feel better if
you told me that this would happen again one day.”

Jim tapped Tony on the shoulder and said, ” ‘PEGGY’ won’t mind,
will you honey?” Peggy removed the mask in one quick motion.

“No Jim, I don’t think I would mind, if you and Tony
wouldn’t mind. I thought it was kind of fun, didn’t you think so,
honey?”

It took a full minute for all of this to register to Tony.
He was incredulous and had no idea what to say. Jim told him,
“don’t try to understand right now Tony. We will explain it to
you later. Just put your eyes back in your head, remember how
great it was and put your pants on.”

CHAPTER FOURTEEN – MIND SEX

Peggy had always admired the young relief mail man. Not only
was he a nice looking man with a great build, he was always
pleasant and cheerful. Her regular business letter carrier was an
obnoxious, obvious liar. He must have stayed up nights thinking
about some of the ludicrous tales that he shared with all of the
business owners in the shopping plaza. She would often hide in
the back of the store at the time that mail was delivered. Tim,
the relief man was a welcome change, and she looked forward to
him stopping in to chat for a few moments a day. Lately, and
quite possibly unconsciously, she had been trying to dress a
little more seductively so that he might notice her a bit more.

Due to the worst illness reported to mankind, Bob, the
regular mail man, announced that he would be on sick leave and
may never return to the ranks of the walking or talking. “Damn
shame,” Peggy thought. Well, at least she would have an oppor-
tunity to see Tim periodically.

“How are you today, Tim?” Peggy asked as the strong, young
mail carrier entered her shop. Her shoulders rolled a bit more
than usual causing her full breasts to dance slightly. She felt
as if her fanny was rather well framed by the jeans she was wear-
ing and would periodically turn around to offer them in their
best light.

“Great! Don’t the leaves changing colors make you think of
when you were a kid?” he asked with his ever-present smile.

“This is my favorite season. I brings to mind visions of
marshmallow roasts, cider and hay rides. We used to always go on
hay rides when we were kids. We didn’t too often have a horse to
pull us; usually it was just a tractor,” Peggy said with a
thoughtful, remembering look in her eyes.

“Too bad we never had the opportunity to go on a hay ride
together,” Tim offered with a slightly wicked grin as he turned
to go.

Peggy was caught off guard. She had often thought about what
a nice young man Tim was. She hadn’t considered that he may have
found her attractive enough to try to become intimate with.
Before she could formulate a response, he was out of the door.
She wondered whether he was serious or just being sociable. Peggy
never gave much thought to having an affair. As a result she
never developed many fantasies. Her husband, Jim had always indi-
cated to her that he wouldn’t be opposed to her expanding her
horizons so long as she didn’t become emotionally involved. She
knew that he had gone astray on a few occasions, but she didn’t
want to know about it. She knew he loved her and didn’t feel
threatened.

Tim and his winning manner began to make her think about it.
What would be so wrong with making love with him. The one thing
that she always thought about when it came to sex was the man’s
buttocks. She would close her eyes and imagine how it looked un-
clothed; rippling as he walked across the room. Visions of his
strong buns tightening to pump his hard meat into her wet hole
would generally drive her crazy with desire. She had done it now.
She had placed the thought in her mind, and she could almost feel
it. Peggy had to get her mind on something else.

As she busied herself with some overdue paper work, the
thoughts continued to visit her. She imagined looking down at the
erect nipples of her ample breasts. His lips moved gently from
one to the other as his teeth gently tugged and manipulated each
in turn. As her mind wandered, she felt her nipples becoming
hard. The thought of his strong hands massaging her naked but-
tocks swam into her head.

Again she could see his erect penis entering her hairy love
tunnel as his ass tightened to drive his bone home. Almost
without thinking her hand fell into her lap, allowing her fingers
to delve into the swollen lips of her wet pussy. Paper work
wouldn’t do. She would have to move around to get this out of her
head. Peggy began to do some stock work. Moving around the shop
seemed to help, at least for the time being.

Six o’clock came and she was free to close the shop and head
for home. By seven she had a light dinner on the table for her
and her husband, and by eight the dishes were in the washer and
she retired to the couch to relax and let the day dissolve. Again
the thought that taunted her earlier returned. She tried
desperately to get her mind on a sit-com that was on the TV, but
it seemed futile. “Jim, would you like to go to bed a little
early tonight?” Peggy asked with a feigned yawn.

“Go ahead honey, I’ll be in just as soon as I get done with
the paper. I won’t be but a few more minutes,” Jim responded
without taking his eyes off of the newspaper. Peggy could think
of nothing but cock driving deep into her greasy love hole. She
began by imagining Jim’s pole, hard and long seeking new depths.
Suddenly, her mind turned once again to Tim. She tried to imagine
how long and thick his cock was, whether his penis rested on
large, heavy balls and how his public hair looked. Peggy wondered
whether one man’s penis tasted any differently or felt any dif-
ferently than another.

After brushing her teeth, she stood nude in front of the
mirror. Her eyes were first attracted to her heavy breasts. She
could see her nipples begin to harden. Without thought her hands
rose to her breasts to feel their weight. Her sharp, painted
finger nails gently scratched the surface of her marble-like
nipples. Shivers of excitement shot like lightening from her
ultra-sensitive nipples to her loins. Her hands dropped to her
hair-covered pussy and spread its lips to reveal her pulsing
clit. Uncontrollably, her buttocks tightened increasing the sen-
sations in her moistening crotch as she slid her finger teasingly
over this fiery nub.

Her hands began to travel from one part of her fine body to
another, touching, teasing, investigating and squeezing. Peggy’s
legs became weak as her excitement increased. She thought better
of standing for this welcomed torture. Peggy sought her soft bed
and quite naturally got hotter and more aroused as her mind con-
tinued its erotic focus. She allowed her fingers to dip down into
the inner folds of her honey pot as one hand reached up and began
to manipulate a soft pink nipple. Moistening her index finger
with her saliva, she began to slide it back and forth over her
expanding nipples. Her ear was tuned in to the sound of Jim’s
recliner chair being released to the ground. Shit! She was ready,
and she needed it soon.

Jim came in shortly afterward, took off his clothes, set out
his night clothes and began to brush his teeth in the adjoining
bathroom. Peggy couldn’t take her eyes off of his hairy ass and
his heavy member swinging gently between his strong legs. Each
time the head of his flaccid penis came into sight, Peggy’s ex-
citement increased. Each time she saw the flex of his buttocks
she imagined that he was driving his bone into her slippery,
tight crevice. Closing her eyes she could see the thick head of
his penis pushing the lips of her tight vagina wide open. “Do you
suppose that you can do me a favor and forget to put your pajamas
on?” Peggy said seductively.

Jim recognized the mood. Peggy needed to ride his hard cock
and get a nut. He smiled his custopeggy smile and said, “anything
for my beautiful love princess.” He entered the sheets to find
that Peggy had removed her night clothes and was ready. He lifted
the sheets to gaze at her lovely body. Her heavy breasts swayed
delightfully back and forth as if they had a life of their own.
Her nipples had hardened to the point of gathering a nice expanse
of her lovely, soft breasts around them. There were wrinkles in
her white tit flesh a full half inch around her dark pink
nipples. As his eyes traveled lower, they settled on her soft,
fluffy muff of pubic hair which warmed her slick vagina. The
muscles of her stomach rippled with anticipation as she threw one
leg over Jim’s thighs and devoured his waiting lips with her own.

Peggy yearned with the excitement that she had allowed to
build throughout the day. Her breasts ached to be sucked and
squeezed. Her thoughts traveled back and forth between Jim and
Tim. Each time that she felt the warmth of Jim’s hand on her
flesh her excitement increased. She was thinking about Tim’s hard
tool investigating her depths. Soon Peggy slid down Jim’s body
and grabbed his stiff bone in a tight grasp. Without further
warning or delay, she engulfed his raging cock with her hot
mouth.

Jim twisted around without dislodging his swollen member,
filled his hands with the flesh of Peggy’s ass cheeks and drove
his hot tongue into her fragrant pussy. They were locked in the
careless, mindless embrace of passion as they had their fill of
one another’s delights.

Moving slowly and methodically, these lovers became locked
together in the traditional embrace of lust. Ever so slowly, he
placed the angry head of his thick staff at the threshold of her
slick sex. He began to slow fuck Peggy as he watcher her eyes
portray a hungry animal. Gradually he picked up the pace in
response to her pleading. As Jim drove his thick spike into
Peggy’s gyrating cock-glove, he filled his hands intermittently
with her quivering thighs, bouncing breasts, and rounded ass
cheeks.

The globes of her full ass rolled and rippled with each
thrust. Jim could never remember her being this horny. As Peggy
came hard for the third time, Jim pulled his cock from her tight
hole, aimed it at her gyrating breasts and shot his thick cream
between her lovely globes. As she grunted away the last of her
climax, thinking of Tim pouring his cream on her tits, Peggy
filled her still twitching hole with one hand and smeared Jim’s
hot come over her nipples with the other hand.

“I don’t know what made you as crazy as you were tonight
honey, but if it was some kind of a pill, take two next time. You
turned me on more than I can ever remember being turned on. I
think it was the wild animal look in your eyes. I hope you en-
joyed it as much as I did, honey,” Jim said as he gasped for
breath. Soon they were both in a deep rewarding sleep.

The next morning Peggy woke first and found that she felt
unusually sore; as if she had done hard physical labor the day
before. Suddenly, she remembered why she felt that way. Peggy en-
tered the hot spray of her morning shower and felt the pulse of
the water dancing on her tender nipples. Soaping the hairy muff
of her womanhood, her mind returned to the visions that she had
trapped in her memory. Her soapy hands slid effortlessly over her
heavy breasts, her tightening nipples, into the crack of her ass
and between the lips of her sex. She was becoming turned on all
over again. Realizing that time was limited, she hurried her
shower and robbed herself of additional pleasure.

As she fixed the coffee and began to realize why she had
been so horny, she began to feel confusion and shame. She had
been thinking of Tim. She could remember seeing his ass flying as
he drove his cock meat into her slick hole. Her shame soon drove
the thought out of her head. Jim came out into the dining room
and smiled at her. She tried to avoid his glance so that she
wouldn’t give herself away. Finally Jim said to her, “Peggy, is
something wrong honey? It couldn’t have been last night. That was
probably the best sex we’ve ever had. I woke up with such a hard
cock I could probably cut diamonds with it.”

Peggy began to whimper as she told Jim about her fantasy and
the guilt she was feeling. Jim listened calmly as she explained
her fantasy and who it was about. A slight smile came over Jim as
he began to comfort her, “Peggy, you didn’t do anything wrong. I
have fantasies all the time. It doesn’t mean that I don’t love
you, or that I prefer to make love with someone else. It’s
natural. Everyone has them. If it would guarantee that we would
have sex like that all the time, you could ball this guy once a
week. Just the thought of you having a fantasy about another man
excites me beyond words.”

“You’re out of your mind! I would never make love with
another man. I am married to you, and my body belongs to you,”
she said with some fire. “I just found that it made it exciting
to think about someone else. I would never cheat on you Jim.”

“Your body doesn’t belong to me. It belongs to you. I don’t
look at it as though you were cheating or even wanted to. I’m
just glad that you enjoyed yourself. It’s always been exciting
for me to know that others found you attractive and sexy. How do
you think I would feel if no one else thought you were sensual or
exciting?” Jim inquired.

“Let’s not talk about it any more right now, OK Jim?” Peggy
pleaded. “I feel very unusual, and I don’t really understand
what’s going on in my head right now. I just want to stop think-
ing about it right now and get ready to open the shop.

“OK honey. Just don’t be too hard on yourself. You enjoyed
it and there was no harm done. I told you once before that the
only thing that would concern me is if you got emotionally in-
volved with someone to the point that you lost your love for me,”
he said.

Peggy answered quickly and emphatically, “I could never love
anyone more than I love you. You’re my partner and my best
friend. You always will be.”

“Now that’s what I like to hear. Go and get ready, you’re
going to be late,” Jim said in a simulated scolding as he tapped
her on the fanny.

As she completed the opening procedure at the shop, Peggy
began to think about how she would feel when Tim brought the mail
in. Would she feel embarrassed or dirty. Could she look him in
the eye if he decided to talk to her. As the noon hour arrived
her anticipation increased. “So did you hear the newest Pea Wee
joke?” Tim asked as he opened the door and floated in. His good
spirits seemed to make everything OK. She caught herself prancing
a bit for him to show off her attributes. They talked about quite
a few different topics in the short time that Tim was able to
stay. As he began to make his last comments prior to departure,
Peggy started to feel sad to see him go. “I wish we could have
talked a little longer,” Peggy said to her own surprise.

“I’ll tell you what Peggy; I get off at four. What do you
say I stop and get us some coffee and bring it by?” Tim sug-
gested. Peggy began to stumble with her words, trying to formu-
late an answer. Tim hurried to her defense by adding, “I guess
that was a bit forward. You will probably be tied up, and I
shouldn’t have asked. I’ll be able to stop tomorrow for a little
while, and we’ll talk then when I deliver the mail.

Peggy, having composed herself and got a grip on what was
going on, thought for a moment and offered, “I’m not all that
busy. It would be nice if you could stop back. I take my coffee
with one cream and one sugar.”

Incredulously, Tim answered, “OK Peggy. It’s a deal. I
should be by at about four-fifteen. See you then.”

What in the hell have I gotten myself into now? Peggy
thought. I’ll just be leading this guy on, and he’s such a nice
guy. Hey! Maybe he doesn’t even have anything on his mind other
than conversation. Not all men are fuck bunnies. He may just want
to talk and kill some time before going someplace. Her mind con-
tinued to develop various scenarios until after four o’clock.

“One coffee with cream and sugar coming up,” Tim announced
as he entered the door negotiating his package. He had apparently
removed his uniform shirt and was wearing his jacket over a tee
shirt.

“Come on in the back so we can drink our coffee without cus-
tomers gawking at us,” Peggy invited. They sat at a small table
next to the divan as Peggy prepared her coffee and began to test
its heat with her lips.

“I bet you were just counting the minutes until I got here,
weren’t you Peggy,” Tim said with a humorous grin on his face. “I
hope that I didn’t give you the wrong impression when I invited
myself over for coffee. I know you are married and from what you
say you are happy. It isn’t my intention to screw anything up,
but you are very attractive and great to talk to. I just enjoy
spending time with you. Don’t get me wrong. I would love to make
love to you, but I fully understand the situation. So let’s have
some coffee, talk about the regular mail man behind his back and
then I’ll run.

Peggy had a slightly shocked look on her face. It was soon
replaced by a sneaking smile. She was flattered by what he had
said and couldn’t help but think how cute he was being. “Tim, I
would be lying to you if I told you that I didn’t think about
being with you. You look great and I enjoy talking with you as
well, but…”

“I know. I know. Don’t say it. You don’t have to explain,”
Tim said in an effort to spare Peggy from the embarrassment of
rejecting him. Peggy set down her coffee and reached out to
cradle his face. As if controlled by some unknown force, she
pressed her full lips to his with closed eyes. His hungry lips
caressed her own and soon moved to the side of her neck. She felt
shivers running down her neck. Her nipples began to tingle, and
she became aware of her moistening womanhood.

As she held his lips close to her hot skin, she panted to
Tim, “I’m always so damn concerned about everyone and everything
around me – trying to be everything that everyone wants me to be.
I’m tired of trying to be perfect. I want you, Tim. I want to
feel you touch me. I need to feel you inside of me. I want to
feel your hard bone go off in me and paint my insides with your
thick cream.”

Peggy jumped up abruptly, excused herself and told Tim that
she would return in a moment. She shot to the front of the shop,
locked the door and turned the OPEN sign around.

Upon her return, Peggy dropped to her knees, her hands fum-
bling with his zipper. She slid her hands over the front of his
trousers, around to his buttocks and returned to quickly released
his raging manhood. Her boiling breath danced on the head of his
penis, and his legs began to weaken. Holding his massive, hairy
balls in her soft hands, she descended on his quaking tool. First
one inch, then another slipped into the comfortable sheath of her
warm mouth. As the head of his rock-hard penis touched the back
of her wet throat, her lips closed on his engorged shaft. Gently
his hands cradled her soft hair, guiding the path of his erect,
searching member. As her lips and tongue played on the thick meat
of his cock, her hands unbuttoned his trousers and lowered them
to the floor. Sensuously, her hands slid up the back of his legs
and clasped his hair-covered buttocks, squeezing him more deeply
into her hungry mouth.

Tim was heaven-bound. He reached down, lifted her sweater
and released the catch to her bra. Peggy’s full, swollen breasts
bounced into his waiting hands. Her nipples felt like marbles in
his strong hands as he squeezed her soft, firm flesh. A croaking
groan escaped her lips and made his swollen cock tremble as he
rolled her nipples between each thumb and index finger. Reaching
under her arms, Tim raised Peggy to her feet, pressed her close
to him and drove his tongue deep into her open mouth. Tim’s hands
slid into the elastic waistband of Peggy’s jeans, beneath her
panties to grasp her smooth, warm buttocks.

The spongy texture of her undulating ass cheeks only served
to increase his excitement. While one hand cupped one of her
ample breasts to test its weight, his other hand dipped into the
moist crevice of her ass to feel its heat. Dropping yet further,
Tim’s hand brushed her anal button, and he could feel the soft,
wiry texture of her tangled pubic hair. His search soon resulted
in the slick swollen prize of her gaping love tunnel. Moisture
began to roll from her as her mind was totally devoted to this
erotic moment.

Peggy’s hands began to fumble with his tee shirt, his jacket
having been summarily discarded. Her fingers searched through the
lustrous hair of his strong chest as she continued to kiss his
neck and shoulders. Soon they were both totally nude and began
their short trip to the divan.

“Let’s take it slow, Peggy. I want this to last as long as
possible. Get up on your knees so I can enter you from behind and
play with your lovely breasts,” Tim suggested softly as his hands
continued to start new fires on her highly sensitized skin.

Peggy slowly turned over and got up on her hands and knees
on the divan. Tim placed his hand high on her shoulders to pres-
sure her to lower her head and elevate her fanny. Taking a posi-
tion behind Peggy, Tim’s eyes were blessed with the most lovely
view of Peggy’s full buttocks and open pussy. He spread her
cheeks with his strong hands and began tasting her sweet honey
pot. Peggy groaned, “Oh, suck my pussy, Tim. Stick you tongue
deep inside of me.” Tim obeyed her orders as he stiffened his
tongue and rubbed it hard against her clit.

Shivering, Peggy whispered, “Fuck me with your hard tongue,
Tim. Drive it deep into my hole. Fuckkkkkkkkk me!” Peggy had
begun to experience her first climax as Tim continued to pay
homage to her burning love hole. She pushed back against his wet
mouth and reached under herself to pinch and roll her nipples. “I
need your cock, Tim. Stick that big piece of hard cock meat into
me. Drive it home, honey.”

Tim didn’t need much encouragement. He wiped his face with
his hand and transferred the moisture to Peggy’s wiggling ass
cheeks. Taking his long, thick pole in his trembling hand, Tim
placed the enlarged head against the swollen, greased lips of her
pulsating pussy. Immediately, Peggy began to press backward in
hopes of expediting the entry. Tim filled his hands with her
shuddering buttocks to control her rearward travel. His eyes were
treated to the lovely texture of her ass. His hands were blessed
with the spongy feel of her writhing globes. The scent of her sex
filled his head with a heavy aroma that spoke pages of primal ex-
citement. Slowly his starchy bone entered Peggy’s wet cavern an
inch at a time. He heard her begin to cry ever so quietly. “Are
you OK, Peggy?” concern filled his voice.

“I haven’t been this OK in a long time, Tim. Fuck your long
pole up into my greasy pussy. Fuck me hard! Fuck me deep! Fuck me
like you’ve never fucked anyone before. Squeeze my ass. Tell me
you need your cock in me. Feel the weight of my tits and pinch my
nipples. Do my tits turn you on?” she continued her staccato
series of wild statements and frantic demands.

“I do need my cock in you, Peggy. I need it bad. Your tits
turn me on more than I can say. The way you’re talking to me
drives me wild. I can’t hold on much longer,” Tim said as he
turned his attention to anything but what he was doing. He
thought about taking out the trash. He thought about rug burn on
his knees. He began to do math problems; anything to keep him
from coming too soon. Suddenly Peggy rolled out from beneath his
driving piston and collapsed on the floor.

“Relax for a moment, Tim. I don’t want this wonderful feel-
ing to be over so soon. Kiss me,” Peggy implored. Tim tenderly
placed his lips against Peggy’s eyelids as they closed. Her arms
reached up to cradle his head to her rolling breasts. Tim reached
down between her splayed legs, and his eager hand rested in the
nest of her pubic bush. It was damp with her juices and covered
her thick, swollen pussy lips. They pouted for additional atten-
tion. First one finger entered her body and then the other. His
thumb began to circle her love button as her head began to roll
back and forth in time with her moans. Lowering his head to suck
on Peggy’s nipples, Tim began to rotate his fingers inside of her
leaking tunnel. Deeper and deeper his efforts were directed,
remembering that the “G” spot was within his reach.

Soon a gush of climax was released from her deepest
recesses, painting his hand as Peggy’s eyes rolled up into her
ecstatic head. “Oh oh ohhhhhhhh Timmmmmm! I’m commminng,” she
groaned long and low. “I need your hard meat to spray my wet hole
with your cream. Put it in. Fuck me hard, please.”

Opening her legs and raising her knees, Tim directed his
gigantic rod into her slippery crevice. The excitement continued
to build as he looked down and saw her pubic hair drenched with
her own excitement. His immense member encountered no resistance
as it quickly slid into her deepest channel. As he slowly
withdrew his glistening rod from her tight pussy, he watched her
pubic hair cling to his shaft. Looking across the room at a
floor-length dressing mirror, Peggy saw the reflection of his
perfectly shaped ass tightening to drive his bone as deeply as
possible. She began to buck wildly. Tim rolled over with Peggy in
tow. Holding her by her arms just above the elbows, Tim continued
to drive his cock up into her swollen, glistening hole. Her heavy
breasts dangled dreamily in his face. Periodically, he would
lower her so that he could intermittently suck on one nipple and
then the other.

Peggy continued to urge him on in the throatiest voice she
could muster, “fuck my hole, Tim. Squirt your thick come into my
pussy. Kiss me! Kiss me.” She lowered her floating tits onto his
chest as her tongue sought his open mouth. His hands reached be-
hind her and began to squeeze her wiggling buttocks. Allowing his
hand to dip into the crack of her ass cheeks, he found that it
too was drenched with her juice. His fingers slid over her slip-
pery anal button and dipped into the rear of her gaping, hairy
hole. He felt his own rigid penis splitting the grasping lips of
her sex.

He drove harder and deeper as his hands continued their as-
sault on her smooth, slippery buttocks. She whispered the lan-
guage of love into his ear urging him on. “Fuck my cunt mother
fucker. Drive your cock bone into my guts. Squeeze my buttocks
and feel my heavy titties on your chest.” Suddenly he could feel
the tell-tail constriction of his heavy balls as he prepared to
spill his fluid into Peggy’s sucking hole. He drove it hard and
deep one last time and froze as the love cream traveled up from
his tight sack, through the rigid vessel of his throbbing cock,
out of its bulbous head and into her gripping love muscle. Peggy
took the last advantage of his unyielding bone and increased the
speed at which her quivering channel slipped over the length of
his penis. Her fingers dug deep into his flexing buttocks as her
eyes returned to the mirror to lock the memory into her fiery
mind. Soon, deep grunts began to issue forth from Peggy as if
they had their origin deep within her. Their climactic juices
mixed into a cocktail of aromatic desire.

The soft tender moments following their union glided away
slowly. Peggy rested in his strong arms as he tenderly kissed her
hair and rubbed the smooth skin of her back. “I would have never
believed that we would have been together,” Peggy spoke first.

“It has been like a dream. Peggy, I don’t think that I have
ever been that turned on. I have often thought of making love to
you. I would come into the shop and look at you. I would try not
to be obvious. I usually waited until your eyes were diverted to
sneak peeks at your lovely body; the swell of your ass as you
walked slowly across the room, the bounce of your breasts, the
smile that slowly appeared when I would come in the door. I am so
glad that you consented to let me make love to you,” he rambled.

She quickly returned, “it wasn’t a matter of consenting,
Tim. I wanted you to. I hope that you won’t think less of me now.
Once the heat of the moment wears off, I hope that I won’t feel
so guilty that I won’t be able to handle it. This is the first
time that I have ever made love with anyone other than Jim.

“Just promise me one thing, Peggy. Just promise me that
there will be another day. Even if you don’t mean it. Promise me.
Let me leave today knowing that I’ll have the opportunity to be
with you again,” Tim pleaded. Faced with Peggy’s silence, Tim
added, “if you can’t promise me that, promise me that we will
continue to be friends.”

“Friends don’t need to make promises like that,” Peggy said.
“Friends let things happen naturally and support one another when
they do happen. Somehow I think that we’ll be together again. I
hope so.” She silently wondered what Jim would think if he knew.
She also wondered whether Jim had ever felt like this with
someone else. She knew that she would again feel this wonder.

Suddenly, Jim snapped his fingers and Peggy fell into a deep
trance. Tim’s muscular young form had miraculously undergone a
metamorphosis. Jim stood in Tim’s place, pleased with the fantasy
that he had led Peggy through. I knew she always wanted to fuck a
mail man, he thought. He left her with the suggestion that she
would not be guilt ridden, and she would relish the memory as a
dream.

CHAPTER FIFTEEN – MIND SEX

Jim was out of town on another business trip. Peggy had been so
busy lately with her new job as a electronic technician that she
hadn’t had time to give much thought to feeding her sexual urges.

It never failed though. She was at a new job site, here was a
great looking guy, working close to her on this project for the
past three days, and she continued to be too shy to show her
interest in hi m. Michael was about 33 years of age, five feet,
ten inches tall and about 165 pounds. He was in great shape and
had a ruggedly handsome face that drew her like a magnet. He was
always dressed impeccably and his dark hair was well groomed.

Each time they came into close proximity, Peggy smelled his
scent and could feel his masculinity. He had a great looking set
of buns that Peggy enjoyed sneaking peaks at as he walked around
the room. From the bulge in the front of his pants, she could
imagine that he would have much to offer. However, she was
concerned that at 43 years of age, he might perceive her as a
little too old for his liking. She didn’t think she could deal
with his rejection. As a result, she didn’t want to make it too
obvious that she found him attractive.

“How about lunch, Peggy? Have you made any plans?” Michael
asked as they finished up the installation of part of the
equipment that his firm had purchased.

“I didn’t have any plans, Michael. What did you have in mind?”
Peggy responded.

“I thought that maybe we could stop by the Cortez. They’re
supposed to have great Mexican food. Are you game?” he queried.
Peggy was surprised and pleased that he would ask her to join
him. They removed to the parking lot and Michael offered to
drive. As they enjoyed a quiet lunch, Peggy began to think that
Michael may be interested in her after all. “I hope that your
husband won’t be upset that we’ve gone out together, Peggy,” he
said.
“Jim wouldn’t mind at all, Michael. He is always encouraging me
to meet new people. Besides, he’s out of town for the next couple
of days. We could be running naked down the middle of the road
and he wouldn’t know,” she responded.

Michael thought for a moment and with his eyes focused on the
rim of his margarita glass said, “Does he also encourage you to
meet new people that find you as attractive as I do?” Peggy
looked at him with disbelief. “You’re not hitting on me, are you
Michael? I thought that I would have to make the first move and I
was afraid that it would be the last as well.”

Michael’s eyes lit up at hearing this, and a smile spread
across his handsome face. “Is there any chance that we can get
together later? I would very much like to get to know you on a
social basis, if you don’t think it would compromise you too
much. I can assure you that I am the soul of discretion.” His
hand reached out and touched her nervous hand as his eyes danced
from her lovely face to her swelling breasts.

“Why don’t you call me at about seven tonight. I’ll know a
little better what page I’m on then. If all goes well, you may be
able to come over and watch a movie or something,” Peggy said as
she became aware of his gaze on her breasts and began to feel a
tingling stir in the pit of her stomach. She was nervous, but she
didn’t want to pass up a chance at spending a little time with
this wonderful looking and sweet man. Jim had so often suggested
that she broaden her horizons. He usually created or helped to
create her fantasies. It would be exciting to break fear’s icy
grip and show Jim that she could be creative all on her own. He
would be shocked and terribly happy to know that she had.

Peggy got home at half past five, fed the fish and began
straightening up the house. She couldn’t get her mind off of
Michael. What had she gotten herself into? She was becoming more
excited but increasingly apprehensive thinking about being with
him. After putting the house in order, Peggy started to run her
bath water. She quickly removed her clothes and suddenly caught
her reflection in the full mirror. She did look great for a woman
her age. Jim always told her that she was one of the most
exciting women he had ever known. She threw her shoulders back
and pressed her full breasts toward the mirror. They were indeed
lovely.

Her hands went to the mounds of tit flesh, felt their weight
and squeezed gently. Her pink nipples were beginning to harden
and contract into beautiful knobs of rubbery meat. Taking each
into her thumbs and forefingers, she began to roll them back and
forth, increasing the pressure. Her hands traveled down the sides
of her firm breasts to her hips, around to her warming thighs and
inward to the curls of her pubic garden. Electricity shot through
her as her fingers sought the nub of her swollen clit. First one
finger entered and then another. She could feel the slick
emission of her love lubricant prepare the way for the searching
fingers of her left hand. With her right hand she reached around
her hip to feel the texture and weight of her tightening ass
cheek. Damn was she hot. She w anted to fuck Michael in the worst
way. She began to imagine how his stiff cock bone would feel in
her hairy cunt when she noticed the bath water reaching a
dangerous level.

She stopped her self assault, turned off the bath water and
tested its temperature. It was just tolerable so she pinned up
her long brown curls and gently entered its heat, continuing to
admire her poised body in the mirror. The heat of the water
served to relax her tensed form. She quickly put herself into a
light trance and seemed to melt into the porcelain of the tub.

The time passed quickly and soon seven o’clock registered on
the clock in the dining room. Minutes later the phone rang. Peggy
slowly approached the phone already having made up her mind to
invite Michael over. “It’s your new electronic friend, Peggy.
Have I caught you at a bad time?” Michael asked.

“Oh no, Michael. You’re right on time. Everything looks good
over here, if you would like to stop over around nine. Would that
work into your plans all right?” she asked in hopes that he
hadn’t changed his mind.

Michael didn’t hesitate for a moment, “My plans can only hope
that you still want to see me. I can be there at nine. Can I
bring anything with me?”

“Just you. We’ll have a little pizza and watch some videos of
the Little Rascals. Don’t be late,” Peggy encouraged prior to
hanging up the receiver. Oh christ, she thought. He really is
coming over. I better find something to wear.

Peggy picked out a pair of stretch pants that accented her legs
and fanny quite well and a fitted top that was a little more low
cut than she wore out in public. Pizza in the oven and a bottle
of white wine on ice, what else, she thought. Well, I guess
that’s it. Now she had only to sit and wait on pins and needles
until he arrived.

The time couldn’t pass quickly enough. Five minutes to nine and
the bell rang. Oh shit, she thought, I didn’t even put on the
front light. She opened the door and Michael stood there with a
cute grin on his face. “You look great, Peggy. What’s that I
smell, pizza?” he said as he entered.

Wine was poured, pizza served and the movie was put in the
video player. Spanky was “hunt’n bugs” and the couple settled on
to the couch to appreciate the antics of the classic kids. “What
prompted you to invite me over, Peggy? I really didn’t think that
you would look twice at me,” Michael said in a soft voice.

Peggy twisted to face him and then diverted her gaze at the
space between them, “In the last few days I’ve had a chance to
work with you and I think I have come to know you well enough to
know that you are a gentleman. That was my first concern. Beyond
that, you look great and you treat me with respect. What’s there
not to like? I’m not going to lie to you. I find you exciting,
and I wanted to spend some time with you. You have…..” Her
mouth was silenced when Michael covered her soft lips with his
own. Immediately, his hands were on her breasts as her breath was
stopped by his quick act ions. She seemed to melt right into his
embrace.

Soon his hands were under to blouse, but it was restrictive
because it was so tight. He reached behind her and unzipped her
zipper and gave himself room to roam. Peggy shrugged her
shoulders without taking her lips from his. The blouse fell free
and she helped him remove it. Her bra held her breasts upright as
if an offering to a god. Michael’s seemingly skilled fingers
found the catch and popped it free. Again she rolled her
shoulders to shed this barrier. As her breasts fell free
Michael’s eyes seemed glued to their sway and dance. His hands
returned slowly and gently as he cradled them seeking the juicy
nipples with his thumb and forefinger. A gratifying gasp escaped
from her mouth directly into his lungs.

Peggy’s fingers reached for the buttons to his shirt and began
to release them. Michael twisted in an effort to dislodge his
shirt tail from its hiding place and tore one of the sleeve
buttons as he discarded his shirt. Peggy’s hands searched his
hairy chest and tweaked his sensitive nipples. Michael could feel
his cock begin its metamorphosis. It was straining within the
confines of his trousers.

Suddenly he rose, unzipped his trousers and left them were they
fell. Peggy slipped her thumbs inside the waistband of her slacks
and peeled them from her heated loins. Michael reached for Peggy
and brought her to her feet to embrace her lovely curves. They
stood locked in one another’s arms exploring, squeezing and
holding each other.

“Come with me, Michael. Let’s go where it is a lot more
comfortable. Bring the glasses and the wine, would you?” Peggy
invited. Michael watched the roll of her well-defined buttocks
under her tight, pink panties as she preceded him to the bedroom.
She seemed to be walking on air. His hot cock continued to become
more rigid as he thought about her hot flesh wrapped around him.

As Peggy deposited Michael in the bed, she excused herself,
walked over to the stereo and turned on the soft sounds of love.
The door to the bath room closed, and she reappeared moments
later with a bottle of coconut oil. “Turn over on your stomach
and relax, Michael. I want to rub your back for you,” Peggy said
seductively as she sat on the edge of the large bed.

Her hands, filled with oil, began to spread the oil on his
back, neck, buttocks and thighs. She loved the feel of his taunt
muscles under her invading hands. Moans escaped Michael’s mouth
as her hands reached between the strong ass muscles to knead the
strong flesh. He could feel the oil slowly run into the crack of
his buttocks and down to his heavy cum sack. Her hands teased his
hairy balls lightly and returned to deeply massage the tensing
knots of his ass. “Turn over, love,” Peggy whispered as she
gently encouraged him with a hand on his hip.

Her eyes were treated as his growing cock meat came into view.
She applied the oil to his pectoral muscles, belly and thighs. He
closed his eyes, put his hands behind his head and relished the
feel of her gentle, but firm hands caress his body. She watched
his eyebrows raise without opening his eyes as she assaulted his
stiff cock bone with one hand and his heavy sack with the other.
A gasp of pleasure escaped his lips as her oil-drenched hand
easily slid down his thick fuck pole to meet the hand on his
hairy balls. “If you keep that up, no pun intended, I’m going to
go off before I should,” he said with a smile with a deep, sultry
voice.

“Now its my turn, Michael. Would you mind giving me a massage?
I’m dying to have your hands on me,” she said as her lips reached
down to touch Michaels. She fell into his arms, and her tongue
slipped between his open lips. She could feel her aching breasts
slide across his greased chest.

He broke the kiss and flipped her on the bed over his hip. “I
can’t wait to touch your beautiful fucking body. Get on your
belly and hand me the oil,” he said authoritatively. In seconds
his strong hands were filled with the oil and touching the
hollows and peaks of her flesh. His eyes moved from her flexed,
towering ass cheeks to the hint of public hair nestled between
her slightly spread leg s. They traveled to her back and the
swell of her breasts on either side. Damn, this woman felt
wonderful. His hands both glided and penetrated her hot flesh.

Michael turned her over and applied the warm oil to her breasts
and belly. Her spiked nipples glistened with the sheen of the
lubricant as did her red-brown public curls. His hands treated
themselves to her tit flesh, raising them into towers and
allowing them to descend to their relaxed state. He teased her
quivering pussy by approaching her enraged clit but not touching
it. Suddenly, he reached deep between her slightly parted legs
and jammed two fingers into her depth. “Ohhhhhhhh! Shit, Michael.
Fuck my hot cunt with your fingers. Move them around, deeper,
harder. Fuck my greasy pussy, honey,” she grunted as her hands
reached out to pull his hand deeper inside of her quaking hole.

“Oh fuck, baby. You are so wet and slippery. My cock is going
to feel soooo good inside your treasure hole. Move around here so
I can taste your honey,” he pleaded. His mouth gorged itself with
her hairy pussy lips as he moved his bulk around so that she
could have access to his furious cock meat.

“Give me your bone, Michael. Let me suck your mother fucking
cock. Squeeze my ass, honey,” she screamed as her lips spread to
accommodate his oil-covered love pole. She drove his penis
immediately into the back of her mouth and lodged its bulbous,
purple-hued head into the tight muscles of her hot throat. Her
moans served to rattle the head of his cock with the vibrations
of her ecstasy.

As Michael drove his tongue into the depths of her slippery
hole, his nose nestled into the rubbery button of her ass hole.
He could feel the tiny hairs surrounding this nether hole tickle
his nose, and he drove it in harder. Her musky fragrance filled
his senses and his cock felt as if it would burst. One hand
reached behind her to fill itself with meandering ass flesh,
while the other reached back to twist one of her glowing nipples.
“Pinch it, Michael. Pinch my nipple hard, harder,” she demanded,
momentarily releasing her mouth from his slippery, driving bone.

Peggy came up, apparently for air, looked down at her breasts
resting on his chest and his chin buried in her muff. “Oh, fuck
me, Michael. I need your cock in my guts. Put your fuck pole in
my cunt, honey.”

Michael released his two-handed grip on her lovely flesh and
rose from the position he was in. She quickly placed herself in
the most vulnerable position; legs spread wide and pulled back.
She saw him grasp his long cock and stroke it as his eyes seemed
to memorize the folds of her slick pussy lips and the heaving of
her breasts. Closer and closer his engorged member came to her
waiting honey pit. As his cock reached the lips of her pouting
cunt, she cradled her left breast with one hand and spread her
hungry pussy with the other.

His cock seemed gigantic with lovely veins feeding its length
and an angry looking spear-head kissing the lips of her
womanhood. She began to quiver in anticipation of the joy she
knew would follow. Michael dipped his cock into her oily pussy
only and inch and removed it. He slid it up and down the length
of her slit to insure that he was well lubricated and then drove
it to the deepest recesses of her canal. “Holy fuuuuck. Oh my god
that feels so good and so deep. Fuck me. Move you cock in and
out. Slam your bone into my hairy hole and fuck me,” Peggy was
repeating with her eyes as wide open as they had ever been.

The look on her face was similar to fear, but Michael knew that
it was the look of love-lust. He continued to drive and withdraw
his thick, rigid cock meat in her gaping love hole. Peggy reached
between their perspiring bodies and inserted her fingers in her
pussy to feel his cock enter. She continued her travels to his
heavy sack and massaged his swaying balls. He felt so good inside
of her a nd although she had her hopes, she never imagined that
this man could make her feel this good. She hoped that his cock
would never stop fucking her sloppy, deep hole.

Michael abruptly stopped as his cock was driven in as deep as
he could go. “Honey, I would like you to get on your knees so I
can fuck your cunt hole from behind. I want to dog-fuck your
wonderfully tight pussy. I want to watch your buns move as I
drive my love bone into your hot hole,” Michael shared as his
cock continued to fuck her sweet smelling honey pot.”

She reluctantly allowed him to remove his shaft from her
treasure chest, as she quickly moved into a kneeling position to
accept his cock again. It was fortunate that he did stop his
assault when he did, as he felt his balls begin to tighten to
their eventual climax. He wanted to make his pleasure and her joy
last as long as it could. As she turned over, he watched her hole
close, and she turned over and assumed the suggested position.
She lower her nipple-crested breasts to the bed, raiser her tight
ass cheeks and greased pussy in the air and said, “Put your thick
cock in my tight, greasy cunt and fuck me like a dog.”

Michael lowered his stiff cock to her hairy, lust slit and
inserted it as he began to talk to her, “Back your smooth ass up
against my cock bone and open your pussy so I can drive my bone
into your love slot, Peggy. I love to fill my hands with your
buttocks. I want to drop my hot fuck load into your guts and hear
you scream with desire. That’s it! Point you sweet cheeks as me.
Damn you tits look good hanging there and swinging like heavy
sacks.” Michael filled his hands with the flesh of her ass cheeks
and drove his straining cock in and out of her tight pussy.

Peggy’s heavy breasts rested against the palms of his hands
as the cock assault continued. Michael kissed her neck and
periodically slipped his tongue into either ear. Peggy was
senseless. At this point there was no romance. There was no
conversation. There was no awareness of anything other than the
raw animal instincts of fucking. Deep guttural grunts came from
her mouth as her eyes rolled up into her head. Peggy bore down
and pressed her gaping cunt and quivering ass cheeks as hard as
she could onto Michael’s raging cock and swollen balls.

A series of staccato, helpless grunts escaped her lips as she
began to cum like never before. Hearing this, smelling the sweet
aroma of sex, feeling his bone deep inside of Peggy’s belly and
the sensation of Peggy’s hard nipples torturing the palms of his
hands, Michael pulled his bone from her spasm-ridden tunnel and
began to shoot his thick cream on her pumping, wiggling ass
cheeks. With one hand Michael ran his spurting cock up and down
the crack of her ass spreading the hot cream on her
finely-textured buttocks. With his other hand he reached around
to her clit and began to furiously rub this swollen nub to
lengthen her pleasure. Then he fell forward, sliding his bone
into the deep crack of her hot cheeks and refilling his hands
with her heavy breasts. Soon they both lay exhausted and
apparently paralyzed.

After they recovered, Peggy and Michael retired to the shower
and cleaned the perspiration and scent of love from one another’s
body. Michael was soon recovered sufficiently to introduce Peggy
to yet additional pleasures. Fantasy and hypnosis were wonderful.
But now Peggy was armed with additional experiences to make the
most of her time alone and with her husband.

When Michael had left, Peggy went over to the bookcase where
the stereo was and turned off the video tape recorder. Jim was
going to get the show of his life when he came home. He probably
didn’t think she had the nerve. Now it was apparent.

APPENDIX I

SELF-HYPNOSIS INDUCTION TECHNIQUES

WHAT IT IS

One of the most common questions about hypnosis is, “Can I
be hypnotize? The answer is, you already have been. I’ll explain
more about that later. However, in order to answer this question
appropriately, one has to know what hypnosis is, and is not. Hyp-
nosis is not sleep as we generally think of it. It is simply an
altered state of consciousness. During hypnosis we put the body
to “sleep” and increase the awareness or concentrate the mind in
a specific direction. In a single word is can be defined as
focus. Autohypnosis is nothing more than self induced hypnosis.

It is only possible for the mind to become focused after the
body does not serve to interrupt our focus. Therefore, our body
feels relaxed, warm, sometimes slightly tingly and at rest. Many
people describe it as the feeling of suspended animation. Our
mind is completely aware of what is going on around us, it is
receptive to suggestion and is still capable of making decisions.
Many empirical studies have been done which suggest that 95% of
the population can be formally hypnotized.

When we are wide awake our mind is in the beta state. As we
eliminate the influences of the body, such as the minor aches and
pains or the muscle tensions, our mind drifts into an altered
state called alfa. Once this state is reached we may then enter
into the theta state. The theta state is hypnosis. With practice
we can reach the delta state which is deep hypnosis.

When I suggested that you already have been hypnotized, I
was referring to common everyday states that are not tradition-
ally considered hypnosis. If you have ever caught yourself
daydreaming, you have reached the theta state. Your mind was
focused and you were not aware of anything else around you. Have
you ever driven your car to a destination you often drive to and
wondered how you got there? Your mind was on something else. You
were in the theta state. Some people allow the thump of the road
or the divider lines in the road to put them to “sleep.” This
also is theta. Deep concentration associated with watching a
movie or reading a book may also bring on the theta state. Vir-
tually all of us have experience one or more of these phenomenon.
If we have, we can be formally hypnotized.

THE PROCESS

Begin the process of autohypnosis by selecting a place of
privacy and comfort; someplace free of noise and distractions. It
is also helpful to use the same place as often as possible, be-
cause as time goes on, it will become a reassuring and comforting
place conducive to your efforts. Relax on a bed, a lounge chair
or even the floor. Many people find that the bath tub is most
conducive to self hypnosis; but exercise caution with the water
level. It is unlikely you would drown, but it can be uncomfort-
able to take in a breath full of water. When possible use the
same position to allow your nervous system to let go.

Dress in a manner that will support your efforts. You will
want to loosen or remove any tight or restrictive clothing.
Removal of any jewelry or eye glasses will also assist in your
initial efforts. Once you have obtained a comfortable position,
empty your mind of any exact thinking and let your mind wander.
Simply relax and enjoy the feeling of doing and thinking nothing.
Just be one with yourself.

You may encounter influences that attempt to interrupt your
relaxation such as recurring specific thoughts or muscle
twitches. Simply push them out of your mind. If you continue to
experience difficulty use a technique called muscle-tensing.
Tense the large muscle groups such as the shoulders, back, but-
tocks, legs, stomach, groin and arms, one group at a time. Tense
them each tightly as you think “Tighten up!; Tense!” Then relax
each group of muscles completely while you think “Relax; Let go
completely!” Next think of your body as something that you are
not attached to. Imagine it as if it were a limp doll laying on a
cloud.

Your eyes are the next element to deal with. Select a spot
above eye level on the wall or ceiling and concentrate your focus
on it. It does not have to be a specific spot. A general spot
will do, but it should be above eye level. Think of your eyes as
becoming tired but do not close them yet. Count backwards from
ten to zero slowly and tell yourself that at the count of zero
you will be able to close your eyes. As you close your eyes think
that there is nothing that you care to see with them; that you
are turning them inward to experience the inner you.

Breathing plays a vital part in your experience. Place your
hand on your stomach just below your chest. As you breath deeply
using your tummy, you will feel the rumble of your breath under
your hand. Don’t use your chest to breathe. After you establish
the correct deep-diaphragm breathing pattern, relax your hand and
return it to your side. One third of the air we breathe goes
directly to the brain. This will also serve to feed the mind and
improve relaxation. When you exhale, your chest and tummy muscles
will relax even more. The heart and internal organs also become
relaxed, sending messages to the brain reinforcing relaxation.

Now you are ready to relax completely. Stress and tension
generally serve to squeeze the minor muscle groups, nerves and
blood vessels. As you become more relaxed and relieve yourself of
tension, the blood circulates better and sends more oxygen to the
brain. You are now ready to give yourself suggestions that will
deepen your relaxation. Start at the top of the head and work
down the body to the feet. Tell yourself to “let go completely!”
Suggest a heavy, limp feeling into each area of the body. You may
even consider recording and playing it to yourself. Such a mes-
sage could be as follows:

“My scalp is relaxing completely. I can feel it reducing the
tension on my face and the temples of my head. My eyes are
heavy and at rest. All of the little muscles and nerves sur-
rounding my eyes are completely relaxed. As I think of my
head relaxing, I can feel it happen.

“The muscles of my neck are continuing to completely relax.
My chest is relieved of tension and my arms are limp and
heavy. I feel a warmth and a heaviness in my back and in my
buttocks. It’s as if I am melting into the surface which
holds me. My hips are heavy and there is a wonderful relaxed
sensation running down my legs into my feet.

“Now my entire body feels at rest and completely free of
pressure. I feel no tension – just an enhanced feeling of
relaxation and well-being.”

If you experience any area of your body that does not sur-
render to this feeling of relaxation and well-being, turn your
focus to that region and continue your suggestions. It will not
take long to correct the situation. One method to assist with
difficult areas is to imagine the area being painted with a local
anesthetic with each breath you take. Soon you will be completely
and totally relaxed.

Another method commonly used is to focus on a particular
part of the body, such as the hands or a single finger. If you
clasp your hands together, feel the sensations associated with
your interlocked fingers. Look at the nails, the cuticles, the
joints of each finger or the lines in each digit. As your focus
increases, the feeling in your fingers will begin to melt away.
You will then notice that you can, at will, recall or heighten
the sensation in your fingers.

Continued practice in this focus effort will provide you
with the ability to turn your hands off and on. This can quickly
be transferred to other areas of the body in a natural manner. As
we concentrate on one area of the body, the rest of the body
naturally relaxes. Whether it is the former method, this method
or any other variation, you are learning to focus your attention
and the body naturally relaxes and will eventually be devoid of
feeling.

You are just about there at this point. The body has been
put to “sleep,” and the mind can become your focus. Imagine a
very pleasant place from your childhood. If nothing immediately
comes to mind, invent one. It could be a warm beach with sea
gulls in the distance providing the music of nature. You are at
rest on your back as you watch the puffs of clouds wander across
the canvas of the sky. The sun is warm on your body. There is no
decision that has to be made. There is nothing that you care to
think about at this point. You simply want to relax your mind and
create a passage to your inner self.

At this stage of your induction you will feel a sense of
well-being and a feeling of togetherness with yourself. You have
hypnotized yourself.

DEEPENING THE TRANCE

There are many techniques that can be used to deepen the
trance. With a little practice, you will be able to reach the
above state within as little as five minutes on the average. Some
people have trained themselves to enter this state within
seconds. At this point your body is “sleeping” and your mind is
relaxed and open to suggestion. Imagine yourself going down a
long escalator, skiing down a long hill, or walking down a long
sloping grass-covered hill. You can select that scenario which
you are most comfortable with. You can’t quite see the bottom,
but you continue to go lower and lower.

With each foot you descend, you are falling deeper and
deeper “asleep.” Soon you will come to realize that you are half
of the way down. At this point, continue to repeat the words,
“Deeper and Deeper – Lower and Lower. More relaxed than I have
ever been before.” Start counting backward from fifty to zero.
With each number you will become deeper “asleep.” When you reach
the bottom, you will be more deeply asleep and more relaxed than
you have ever been before.

NOW WHAT

Once you have reached the desired state of hypnosis, what
will you do now? The answer is anything that you wish. In the
initial several sessions, I recommend that you simply enjoy the
sensation that you have created. Most people enjoy the sensation
of deep relaxation. Your body becomes very lethargic and seems to
melt into the surface which holds you. After this, it is impor-
tant to determine what improvements you wish to make. Each of us
have characteristics that we are happy with and others that we
would like to change.

Even at this level of hypnosis we can make remarkable ad-
vances. We can correct our weight problems, quit smoking, get a
more restful sleep, reduce or eliminate pain or correct some
other habitual behavior. We can increase our sexual sensations,
improve our memory or develop our waking focus in some other
positive fashion.

As you become advanced, positive and negative hallucinations
can be created. We can create things that are not there or erase
things that are. Each of our five senses can be hallucinated. We
can give ourselves suggestions which make us actually see some-
thing appear in a room. We can refrain from feeling something
that we are touching. We can smell a roast beef dinner that isn’t
there. We can increase or decrease the room temperature. Most of
these hallucinations require a great deal of work initially. Once
it is acquired, it can be called upon at any time.

The reduction or elimination of pain is a useful tool, espe-
cially if we encounter some chronic situation in our lives such
as arthritis. Going to the dentist has its draw-backs. We can
easily desensitize our mouth and teeth. Simply remember the sen-
sation of novocain that you experienced at one time or another.
These sensations are filed away in the computer that we call our
brain. Every sensation that we have ever had is filed in this
computer. Once you develop the ability to turn on your anes-
thetic, it can easily be reproduced at the dentist’s office.

These are only a few of the things that can be created with
the use of self-hypnosis. Each phenomenon will be very real. Al-
though virtually anything can be accomplished, I recommend that
you begin slowly. Instead of creating an hallucination, try an
illusion instead. The difference is, by way of example, turning
something into something else. Visually, you may care to turn a
coat rack into a tree. The first time you experience something
like this, it will shock you. This shock factor will strengthen
the foundation you are building for yourself. Soon you will be
your own master. Weight loss, quitting cigarettes, memory reten-
tion, improved sexual libido and pain reduction are only a few of
the things that can be accomplished. Simply remember that you
will get as much out of it as you put in. I’ll try to share more
with you in the future. For now – just relax and enjoy!

Finally I went to sleep. While my aunt and uncle were up long
before daybreak, I slept until nearly nine. I awoke and just
laid quietly, feeling my morning hardon more intensely than usual
as I visualized last night’s session with Shawn on his couch. I
loved his legs, laying across my lap. How he spread them so I
could play with his thighs and work my hands down to his
underpants. And my surprise to find his rather large dick stiff
under the cotton cloth. Even though a blanket covered us, I
visualized what his small fingers looked like as he played with
my dick as I played with his. What a night it was! Well the day
wouldn’t promise anything if I didn’t get up to start it. So I
got up, went into the bathroom and took a shower.

“Well typical…city people sleep half the day,” smiled my aunt
as she fried me two eggs and bacon. I was already fully awake
but I wasted no time getting a cup of coffee down.

“So you were across the street quite a while?” she asked.

“Oh yeah,” I said. “Watched a movie with the boys. I can’t ever
go to bed before about midnight.” I was hungry so I wolfed down
those eggs. “Where’s Chucky?”

“Your uncle is out in the southwest pasture counting cattle. He
wants you to drive over there. I dont think you’ve seen it.”

“Yeah, okay,” I answered. “First I want to wake up. This is
vacation…I don’t want him putting me to work.”

Teresa smiled. “Not to worry. He just wanders around pretending
to be busy. Those cows out there take care of themselves this
time of year.” She went on. “You know Chucky…he spends his
time in town at that country bar with his VFW friends.”

The screen door opened and I turned around, expecting to see
Uncle Chuck. I inhaled suddenly when I saw it was Shawn. He
bravely made himself at home by just walking right in, sitting
down next to me at the kitchen table.

Teresa didn’t smile. “Well I suppose you want eggs too,
Shawny…your mom didn’t feed you this morning?”

“Nope…I slept too late.” Shawn grabbed a piece of toast off of
my plate, looked me straight in the eye and painted a very wide,
pretend smile on his face. “Long time no see!”

“Yeah, right!” I said, as I doubled my fist and tapped him on
his arm. “So what are you doing today, bud?”

“Hanging around with you.” He filled his mouth with toast and
gave me a long, penetrating stare. His eyes said it all and I
knew it would be a great day.

We finished breakfast and I told Shawn the bad news. I had to go
see my uncle in the southwest pasture. “But you can tag along in
case I get lost.”

“MMMkay,” Shawn pretended nonchalance. “Jason’s coming. Mom and
dad are gone so I have to watch him.”

“Okay, fine,” I answered cheerfully. But I showed him some
disappointment with my eyes. We got up and said our goodbyes and
thanks to Teresa and then headed for the car. He ran ahead.
Today he was wearing a tank top and a pair of cotton shorts. I
looked at his narrow buns and visualized what I had seen the
night before…his cute white ass spread out before my face.

As I got in the car, he was already in the front seet. He put
his back to the door, turned his body to face me, spread his legs
and lifting one foot up to the console between our bucket seats.
My eyes went immediately to his loins. Once again, I was looking
at his underpants between the open, loose legs of his shorts.
His undies were stretched out and I could see his boysac in the
morning light. He was offering a look and I took it.

“I sure had fun with THAT last night, Shawny!”

“Yeah I know. So did I.” I backed out onto the gravel driveway
and Shawn told me to stop by his place to pick up his brother.
We did and Shawn sat up on the console as Jason climbed into the
car.

“Its about time,” Jason whined. “I thought you guys were going
to leave me here alone.” Jason’s not so bad looking either. His
hair is darker and his eyes are brown. Unlike Shawn, Jason’s
complexion is much darker. He’s alittle bit heavier but not fat.
Both boys have long, unkept hair. Jason too wore a pair of
shorts and a tanktop. He was cute…but noisy.

We drove the country roads to the far pasture. I rested my arm
on Shawn’s bare leg as I tried to keep in physical contact with
him as much as I could. He made it easy. He put his arm around
my neck as I drove. All I could think about was my
disappointment that Jason was along for I would have been in
Shawn’s pants even now, had we been alone.

Twice, Jason got out. Farmboys know how to unhook
wire fencegates, open them for cars to pass and then close them
to prevent the livestock from doing the same. I looked at him as
he walked back to the car, thinking here’s the little brother of
the boy I sucked last night. Briefly, the thought crossed my
mind that these two boys might someday be doing the same thing to
each other. But the thought passed.

My uncle was parked on the very far side of the pasture. We
drove down a deep valley and across to the ridge on the other
side where his pickup was, next to a treelined draw. I watched
the tireruts carefully to prevent my car from bottoming out.
When we got there, both boys and I jumped out and walked over to
him. Chuck was just standing there watching us. It was already
getting warm.

“Hey Nephew,” he drawled. ” You just about missed me. I’ve got
things to do.” We chatted awhile while the boys took off to
explore the nearby treeline. Chuck said he had to go into town
and he asked if I could get back without getting stuck.

“No problem….I followed the path pretty well.” I told him how
peaceful it is out here.

“You’re right about that.” He walked towards his pickup. “If
you want to see some nature, go down there past the treeline and
you’ll see the best fishing pond in this county.”

And he added, “You watch those kids though…they can get pretty
ornery.” Ornery isn’t the word I would have used about Shawn
but I answered that I’d take care of em.

With that, he started up his Ford and headed across the pasture.
When truck disappeared over a ridgeline, I walked into the little
forest and yelled for Shawn.

“Over HERE!” he yelled back. I followed the voice and found both
boys sitting next to the pond. It was in a clearing. It had to
be twenty yards across. It was completely secluded by a treeline
on one side and tall grass on the other. There were cattle paths
on the far side and I knew it was a source of water for the cows
which were grazing on the hill.

“Well, Chucker’s gone into town. What’ll we do?”

“SKINNYDIP!” Shawn yelled, almost like a challenge.

“Yeah, lets DO it!” answered Jason. Both boys looked to me for a
reaction. It was warming up and I was pretty interested in the
prospect of seeing these two boys running bare assed naked into
that water. I reached down with my hand and sampled the water
temperature. The water was shallow and still due to the
windbreak. I could see the muddy bottom but just ten yards away,
it was deeper and a large treetrunk formed a waterbreak as it
extended into deep water. It almost like a dock the way it
jutted straight into the lake. I expected the water to be cold
since it was early June. But in the shallows it was very warm–
almost bathlike. I didn’t say anything for afew seconds as if I
were pondering a tough decision. But I sensed some serious
eagnerness. A little more silence, just to tease them.

“Sure…why not?” I looked at Shawn and he grinned. Farmboys
know all about skinnydipping in ponds and in a flash, their
shorts were in figure eight circles as they stepped out of them.
Tanktops came off in an instant and both boys bottoms dropped to
the ground and fast fingers were working on their shoes. They
got up and took to the water before I even had my belt undone.
But I stopped long enough to see two bouncing boybutts heading
into the pond. Shawn has a nice shape. He’s slender but his
shoulders are broad making his back well formed and the V pointed
to his lovely assmuscles. I took my eyes off of him long enough
to see Jason who was a smaller, but darker version of boybeauty.
Such a turnon to see two boys with long hair and bareskin.
Shawn’s skin was whiter than Jasons. Except for the ten year
old’s bottom. It was apparent that the younger boy had already
worked up a presummer tan because I could see the color contrast
between tan and previously unexposed fanny.

As they reached two foot water, they collapsed their legs and the
mud they stirred up hid their bodies. Splashing, the water on
their shoulders glistened in the late morning sun. Off came my
shirt and pants, shoes and socks. I wanted in the water before
my dick gave away my lust. Both boys turned and watched me, now
naked, wading out to them. I was swelling abit and trying to
avoid looking at them. I looked at the cows grazing in the
distance and tried to think about COWS until my growing manhood
was submerged.

“I told you he was big,” Shawn said. His brother stared directly
at my loins. I didn’t know what the hell to think.

“What?” I muttered.

Shawn smiled. “I told him what we did last night.”

A shot of fear ran through me…but not for long.

“We’ve never sucked before but I told him that its better than
just playing around.”

I waded past them into deeper water to make my modesty alittle
more comfortable. Both boys followed me. I was in about three
feet or more of water now and I crouched down to leave only my
neck and chest exposed. The boys struggled with the depth and
each grabbed onto a shoulder, one on each side. The water this
deep was cooler but I started getting used to it. Shawn shifted
himself in front of me and gently sat on my right thigh. I could
feel his thighs resting on my leg and I studied his nose and eyes
as he was right in front of my face. Instinctively I brought my
arm down and rested my hand on his bare hip. A place where there
should be swimsuit but there was none and the water didn’t feel
cold anymore because I was warming up all over.

I didn’t know what to think about Jason but he shifted himself
too towards my front and he straddled my other thigh and squeezed
his legs together, gripping me. I could feel the pressure of a
hard on coming. I knew his ass was resting on my leg.

“Well this is pretty fun, no doubt about it,” I said in a low
tone to these two naked boys. I dropped my right hand to Shawn’s
bare bottom and spread my fingers so as to cover as much of his
fleshy asscheeks as I could hold. And my left hand reached
around Jason’s waist and I pulled him towards me. Somebody’s
body touched my stiff dick but I wasnt even sure whose.

“Feel his dick, Jase,” Shawn ordered. I knew then it was Shawns
leg against me and I watched the top of Jason’s arm move towards
me. A small hand found my underwater hardon and squeezed it.

“Boy he’s bigger NOW,” Jason giggled. I figured I was about
three feet long and hard as a steel rod. I never felt more
excited in my life as I felt Jason’s small fingers squeezing and
examining. He was alittle clumsy with it and that made me
even hotter.

I pulled my left hand from the back of Jason’s waist and found
his little peter sticking straight out. And with my other hand,
I ran my index finger down Shawn’s crack and played with has
asshole.

“So you guys play with each other, huh?” I said to Jason.

“Yeah, Shawny likes me to jack him off. But I’m not old enough
to cum yet.” The boys looked at each other and Shawn nodded.

“We never fool around with anybody else.” Shawn added and then
he reached down and put his hand on my dick so I had two little
hands on it.

“I hope mine gets as big as yours…and Jason’s too.”

Both boys laughed. I moved my right hand from Shawn’s fanny to
his front and felt his hardness, just as it was last night.

“I’d say you’ll get there but Jason’s got a ways to go.” I
squeezed both of them at the same time, comparing their size.
Shawn had a dick and Jason still had a peepee, I thought. But
their hardness was equal, if not their size. So here we were in
a pond out in the middle of nowhere, naked and squeezing each
other’s dicks.

“So what dirty little deeds do you boys wanna do?” I asked them
as I squeezed their dicks all the more.

Jason was quick to answer. “I want you to show me how you suck
Shawny,” he said nonchalantly. There was no guilt in his voice.
He was just as matter of fact as if he wanted me to show him how
to hook a worm. “And then I want you to suck ME.”

“Yeah, I can do that,” I said. “But first, lets play around in
the water for alittle while. We’ll do that after we get out.”

I thought a minute about what delights we might try before that.
While I thought about it, I moved my hands all over their bodies,
moving from their dicks to their hips and asses. Shawn’s was
very accessible because it stuck out to the right of my thigh.
As I felt around Jason’s back and reached for his bottom, he
leaned up on his straddle of my left leg and gave me access.

Without saying a word, Shawn changed positions so he too
straddled my thigh…only he was on my right leg. I had each of
my index fingers massaging a different boyhole. As I released
them and brushed their hips and brought my fingers to their
dicks, both boys leaned back to give me their frontsides. Even
though they were virtually weightless in the water, I had to
shift my balance to keep myself from falling over as I held them.

“Lets go alittle deeper so I can stand up.” And with that, I
shoved both boys off of my thighs and put my arms around each of
their waists and started moving to where the water was closer to
five feet. I wasnt sure what we could do but it seemed like the
thing to do to try some things. “Get in the back Shawny, and
stick your dick into my butt.” I knew he wouldnt be able to get
that done but I wanted to feel him against my ass. I spread my
legs wide and bent forward and felt him bring his hips up against
me and I felt his hardness up against my asscrack. His dick
found my asshole and he pushed. It felt nice but I knew he
wasn’t going to get inside. I floated Jason on his back and he
spread his legs before my face while I kept him bouyed. His dick
was just out of the water so I pulled him closer to me and I
kissed its firm underside. It stuck straight up towards the sky
as he wrapped his legs around my neck.

Shawn had tried what I asked but he grew bored. I moved him
around the front to join Jason. They let me move them as I
wanted so I put Shawn where his dick might be shoved against his
litlte brother’s ass. He wasn’t impressed.

“Lets get out and go suck.” I could tell he didn’t have the
assfetish that I did. With that, I said fine and I towed the
boys to more shallow water. When they reached a comfortable
depth, they took off on their own and waded to shore. All three
of us marched out of the water bareskin naked into the sunlight.
Three hardons.

“Grab your clothes and lets hustle for cover.” I didn’t like
having sex with two little boys out in the open, even if we were
a long ways from humanity. As we got to the treeline, I used my
shirt to wipe the large droplets of water from Shawn’s skin.
“Lets get dried off after our little baths.”

I felt abit chilled but Jason used his shirt to dry me. He
didn’t seem abit cold. I guess farmboys are just used to
swimming. We walked into the trees which were very tall,
providing a high ceiling. There was little foliage on the ground
and the dirt was covered with last year’s fallen leaves.

“This will be nice,” I said when I found a place that provided us
abit of cover. I sat down in front of the boys, surveying their
nakedness. I studied the differences between their bodies.
Shawn was beginning a sprout of hair above his semi-hard dick.
Jason’s pencil boner still stuck straight out. There wasn’t a
hair on him except on his head. “You two are sure cute!” I said,
as I flicked their dicks playfully. “So what shall we do?”

Both boys answered almost at the same time. “Suck!” they said.

“Well, youre gonna get a good lesson, guys, because I can suck
the chrome off of a trailer hitch.” It was one of my favorite
lines. Shawn laughed but Jason didn’t get it. “Who gets to be
first?”

“HE does,” said Jason. “He’s older.”

“That won’t break your heart, will it Shawny?” I grinned.

“Nope.” Shawn laid down and spread his legs. His dick grew abit
at the thought of it. I studied his hard, red head, his thick
four inch shaft and his ballsac. Jason laid down beside him and
put his head very close to his brother’s hip.

“First, you tease him alittle bit.” I took Shawn’s boydick in my
hand, held it perpindicular to his body to make it harder. I
opened my mouth and put a hot breath on it. As he felt the
warmness, the muscles in his groin contracted and his dick
spasmed in my hand. “Then you get him wet…you kiss it and lick
it. Make it last awhile.” I showed him how to make love to the
underside of a boydick. Kissing and licking.

“Very special place, right here,” I instructed as I darted my
tongue across the rim of Shawn’s head. “How you doin, Shawny?”

Shawn’s chest rose and fell in deep breaths. He was laying back
with his eyes closed. “No complaints here!” As I paused to look
up, I squeezed his dick with my hand and a droplet appeared.

“That’s called precum. It’s very slippery,” I lectured.

I smiled, visualizing these boys playing with each other when
they were supposed to be sleeping. “I guess you know alot about
your brother, eh?”

“Yeah. He likes me to spread it around with my fingers.”

Shawn interrupted. “Enough of this school. You’re forgetting
about ME!”

I didn’t need to be prompted. I put his dick back in my mouth
and enjoyed the slightly salty, slippery taste on my tongue. I
sucked him harder now and took all of him in my mouth.

“Shawny’s gonna cum pretty soon.” Jason predicted. “What are you
going to do?”

I’m gonna LET him…it’s good.” I went back to Shawn and worked
him.

“Can I try it?” Jason had had enough instruction.

“If its okay with Shawn, it’s okay with me.” Shawn nodded as he
kept his eyes closed. Jason and I traded places. The ten year
old grabbed his shorts and wiped my saliva off of his brother. I
smiled at that little touch of sanitation. He wiped it once as
if it was a Cokebottle and then proceeded to put his lips to the
head. It both excited and amused me as I saw this youngster put
his brother’s now “cleaner” dick in his mouth and suck on it just
as I had. He was on his hands and knees. I watched him for a
moment, partly to see if he was doing it right and partially to
fill my eyes with something I’d never seen before…two young
boys engaged in sucking.

Don’t bite him…keep your teeth off of him,” I cautioned.
“While you do HIM, I’ll do you, Jase.” I said as I got up and
ran my hands along Jason’s bare boyback. I carressed his fanny
and told him to spread his legs alittle. Jason obeyed without
stopping the blow job he was giving his older brother.

I crawled around behind the younger boy’s ass and got down on my
own elbows and knees and proceeded to kiss his asscheeks. My
tongue danced up and down his crack; I felt the firm boyflesh on
each side of my tongue and I probed the center where his rosebud
surely was. Jason arched his back to open himself as my tongue
found it. Knowing we had just finished a nice swim, I eagerly
centered on his little hole and I licked it intently, probing
with the tip of my tongue. He spread even more and I used my
fingertips to spread his cheeks further so I could press my face
into his ass. I rubbed my lips and cheeks all over his boybutt.
And then turned around and laid down under him. His short legs
made his dick protrude down to a perfect level for me take it
completely into my mouth. It was small but hard as a thick
pencil. I reached around and played with the cheeks of Jason’s
fanny and his tiny boysac. It was round and firm.

Shawn groaned and I knew Jason was about to get a mouthful of his
brother’s juice. Not alot, for Shawny was only twelve. I
stopped sucking the ten year old but I kept his penis in my
mouth. I wanted to listen to what happened. Jason coughed twice
as Shawn squirted his boyhood into his little brother’s sucking
and unprepared mouth. Jason rose up quickly and I turned and
crawled over to Shawn. There was boycum oozing from his wet
dick.

Quickly I said, “Ya don’t waste this” and then I put my mouth
back on Shawn and sucked the remaining bit of his dickjuice.
When I was finished, I leaned up and said, “And I like to kiss my
boy so he can tast